// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.11;
/// @author thirdweb
//   $$\\     $$\\       $$\\                 $$\\                         $$\\
//   $$ |    $$ |      \\__|                $$ |                        $$ |
// $$$$$$\\   $$$$$$$\\  $$\\  $$$$$$\\   $$$$$$$ |$$\\  $$\\  $$\\  $$$$$$\\  $$$$$$$\\
// \\_$$  _|  $$  __$$\\ $$ |$$  __$$\\ $$  __$$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$  __$$\\ $$  __$$\\
//   $$ |    $$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |  \\__|$$ /  $$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$$$$$$$ |$$ |  $$ |
//   $$ |$$\\ $$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |      $$ |  $$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$   ____|$$ |  $$ |
//   \\$$$$  |$$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |      \\$$$$$$$ |\\$$$$$\\$$$$  |\\$$$$$$$\\ $$$$$$$  |
//    \\____/ \\__|  \\__|\\__|\\__|       \\_______| \\_____\\____/  \\_______|\\_______/
import "./extension/interface/IContractFactory.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/metatx/ERC2771Context.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/Multicall.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/proxy/Clones.sol";
contract TWCloneFactory is Multicall, ERC2771Context, IContractFactory {
    /// @dev Emitted when a proxy is deployed.
    event ProxyDeployed(address indexed implementation, address proxy, address indexed deployer);
    constructor(address _trustedForwarder) ERC2771Context(_trustedForwarder) {}
    /// @dev Deploys a proxy that points to the given implementation.
    function deployProxyByImplementation(
        address _implementation,
        bytes memory _data,
        bytes32 _salt
    ) public override returns (address deployedProxy) {
        bytes32 salthash = keccak256(abi.encodePacked(_msgSender(), _salt));
        deployedProxy = Clones.cloneDeterministic(_implementation, salthash);
        emit ProxyDeployed(_implementation, deployedProxy, _msgSender());
        if (_data.length > 0) {
            // slither-disable-next-line unused-return
            Address.functionCall(deployedProxy, _data);
        }
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual override returns (address sender) {
        return ERC2771Context._msgSender();
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual override returns (bytes calldata) {
        return ERC2771Context._msgData();
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
interface IContractFactory {
    /**
     *  @notice Deploys a proxy that points to that points to the given implementation.
     *
     *  @param implementation           Address of the implementation to point to.
     *
     *  @param data                     Additional data to pass to the proxy constructor or any other data useful during deployement.
     *  @param salt                     Salt to use for the deterministic address generation.
     */
    function deployProxyByImplementation(
        address implementation,
        bytes memory data,
        bytes32 salt
    ) external returns (address);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (metatx/ERC2771Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.9;
import "../utils/Context.sol";
/**
 * @dev Context variant with ERC2771 support.
 */
abstract contract ERC2771Context is Context {
    /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow state-variable-immutable
    address private immutable _trustedForwarder;
    /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
    constructor(address trustedForwarder) {
        _trustedForwarder = trustedForwarder;
    }
    function isTrustedForwarder(address forwarder) public view virtual returns (bool) {
        return forwarder == _trustedForwarder;
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual override returns (address sender) {
        if (isTrustedForwarder(msg.sender)) {
            // The assembly code is more direct than the Solidity version using `abi.decode`.
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                sender := shr(96, calldataload(sub(calldatasize(), 20)))
            }
        } else {
            return super._msgSender();
        }
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual override returns (bytes calldata) {
        if (isTrustedForwarder(msg.sender)) {
            return msg.data[:msg.data.length - 20];
        } else {
            return super._msgData();
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (proxy/Clones.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1167[EIP 1167] is a standard for
 * deploying minimal proxy contracts, also known as "clones".
 *
 * > To simply and cheaply clone contract functionality in an immutable way, this standard specifies
 * > a minimal bytecode implementation that delegates all calls to a known, fixed address.
 *
 * The library includes functions to deploy a proxy using either `create` (traditional deployment) or `create2`
 * (salted deterministic deployment). It also includes functions to predict the addresses of clones deployed using the
 * deterministic method.
 *
 * _Available since v3.4._
 */
library Clones {
    /**
     * @dev Deploys and returns the address of a clone that mimics the behaviour of `implementation`.
     *
     * This function uses the create opcode, which should never revert.
     */
    function clone(address implementation) internal returns (address instance) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            let ptr := mload(0x40)
            mstore(ptr, 0x3d602d80600a3d3981f3363d3d373d3d3d363d73000000000000000000000000)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x14), shl(0x60, implementation))
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x28), 0x5af43d82803e903d91602b57fd5bf30000000000000000000000000000000000)
            instance := create(0, ptr, 0x37)
        }
        require(instance != address(0), "ERC1167: create failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Deploys and returns the address of a clone that mimics the behaviour of `implementation`.
     *
     * This function uses the create2 opcode and a `salt` to deterministically deploy
     * the clone. Using the same `implementation` and `salt` multiple time will revert, since
     * the clones cannot be deployed twice at the same address.
     */
    function cloneDeterministic(address implementation, bytes32 salt) internal returns (address instance) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            let ptr := mload(0x40)
            mstore(ptr, 0x3d602d80600a3d3981f3363d3d373d3d3d363d73000000000000000000000000)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x14), shl(0x60, implementation))
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x28), 0x5af43d82803e903d91602b57fd5bf30000000000000000000000000000000000)
            instance := create2(0, ptr, 0x37, salt)
        }
        require(instance != address(0), "ERC1167: create2 failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Computes the address of a clone deployed using {Clones-cloneDeterministic}.
     */
    function predictDeterministicAddress(
        address implementation,
        bytes32 salt,
        address deployer
    ) internal pure returns (address predicted) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            let ptr := mload(0x40)
            mstore(ptr, 0x3d602d80600a3d3981f3363d3d373d3d3d363d73000000000000000000000000)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x14), shl(0x60, implementation))
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x28), 0x5af43d82803e903d91602b57fd5bf3ff00000000000000000000000000000000)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x38), shl(0x60, deployer))
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x4c), salt)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x6c), keccak256(ptr, 0x37))
            predicted := keccak256(add(ptr, 0x37), 0x55)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Computes the address of a clone deployed using {Clones-cloneDeterministic}.
     */
    function predictDeterministicAddress(address implementation, bytes32 salt)
        internal
        view
        returns (address predicted)
    {
        return predictDeterministicAddress(implementation, salt, address(this));
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (utils/Address.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library Address {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.
        return account.code.length > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCall(target, data, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        require(isContract(target), "Address: static call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a delegate call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.4._
     */
    function functionDelegateCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionDelegateCall(target, data, "Address: low-level delegate call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a delegate call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.4._
     */
    function functionDelegateCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(isContract(target), "Address: delegate call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.delegatecall(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verifies that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
            if (returndata.length > 0) {
                // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                    revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
                }
            } else {
                revert(errorMessage);
            }
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract Context {
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.5.0) (utils/Multicall.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./Address.sol";
/**
 * @dev Provides a function to batch together multiple calls in a single external call.
 *
 * _Available since v4.1._
 */
abstract contract Multicall {
    /**
     * @dev Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
     */
    function multicall(bytes[] calldata data) external virtual returns (bytes[] memory results) {
        results = new bytes[](data.length);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < data.length; i++) {
            results[i] = Address.functionDelegateCall(address(this), data[i]);
        }
        return results;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (access/Ownable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/Context.sol";
/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * By default, the owner account will be the one that deploys the contract. This
 * can later be changed with {transferOwnership}.
 *
 * This module is used through inheritance. It will make available the modifier
 * `onlyOwner`, which can be applied to your functions to restrict their use to
 * the owner.
 */
abstract contract Ownable is Context {
    address private _owner;
    event OwnershipTransferred(address indexed previousOwner, address indexed newOwner);
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the contract setting the deployer as the initial owner.
     */
    constructor() {
        _transferOwnership(_msgSender());
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if called by any account other than the owner.
     */
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        _checkOwner();
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Throws if the sender is not the owner.
     */
    function _checkOwner() internal view virtual {
        require(owner() == _msgSender(), "Ownable: caller is not the owner");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Leaves the contract without owner. It will not be possible to call
     * `onlyOwner` functions anymore. Can only be called by the current owner.
     *
     * NOTE: Renouncing ownership will leave the contract without an owner,
     * thereby removing any functionality that is only available to the owner.
     */
    function renounceOwnership() public virtual onlyOwner {
        _transferOwnership(address(0));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Can only be called by the current owner.
     */
    function transferOwnership(address newOwner) public virtual onlyOwner {
        require(newOwner != address(0), "Ownable: new owner is the zero address");
        _transferOwnership(newOwner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     */
    function _transferOwnership(address newOwner) internal virtual {
        address oldOwner = _owner;
        _owner = newOwner;
        emit OwnershipTransferred(oldOwner, newOwner);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract Context {
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (utils/structs/EnumerableSet.sol)
// This file was procedurally generated from scripts/generate/templates/EnumerableSet.js.
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Library for managing
 * https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Set_(abstract_data_type)[sets] of primitive
 * types.
 *
 * Sets have the following properties:
 *
 * - Elements are added, removed, and checked for existence in constant time
 * (O(1)).
 * - Elements are enumerated in O(n). No guarantees are made on the ordering.
 *
 * ```
 * contract Example {
 *     // Add the library methods
 *     using EnumerableSet for EnumerableSet.AddressSet;
 *
 *     // Declare a set state variable
 *     EnumerableSet.AddressSet private mySet;
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * As of v3.3.0, sets of type `bytes32` (`Bytes32Set`), `address` (`AddressSet`)
 * and `uint256` (`UintSet`) are supported.
 *
 * [WARNING]
 * ====
 * Trying to delete such a structure from storage will likely result in data corruption, rendering the structure
 * unusable.
 * See https://github.com/ethereum/solidity/pull/11843[ethereum/solidity#11843] for more info.
 *
 * In order to clean an EnumerableSet, you can either remove all elements one by one or create a fresh instance using an
 * array of EnumerableSet.
 * ====
 */
library EnumerableSet {
    // To implement this library for multiple types with as little code
    // repetition as possible, we write it in terms of a generic Set type with
    // bytes32 values.
    // The Set implementation uses private functions, and user-facing
    // implementations (such as AddressSet) are just wrappers around the
    // underlying Set.
    // This means that we can only create new EnumerableSets for types that fit
    // in bytes32.
    struct Set {
        // Storage of set values
        bytes32[] _values;
        // Position of the value in the `values` array, plus 1 because index 0
        // means a value is not in the set.
        mapping(bytes32 => uint256) _indexes;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a value to a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was added to the set, that is if it was not
     * already present.
     */
    function _add(Set storage set, bytes32 value) private returns (bool) {
        if (!_contains(set, value)) {
            set._values.push(value);
            // The value is stored at length-1, but we add 1 to all indexes
            // and use 0 as a sentinel value
            set._indexes[value] = set._values.length;
            return true;
        } else {
            return false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes a value from a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was removed from the set, that is if it was
     * present.
     */
    function _remove(Set storage set, bytes32 value) private returns (bool) {
        // We read and store the value's index to prevent multiple reads from the same storage slot
        uint256 valueIndex = set._indexes[value];
        if (valueIndex != 0) {
            // Equivalent to contains(set, value)
            // To delete an element from the _values array in O(1), we swap the element to delete with the last one in
            // the array, and then remove the last element (sometimes called as 'swap and pop').
            // This modifies the order of the array, as noted in {at}.
            uint256 toDeleteIndex = valueIndex - 1;
            uint256 lastIndex = set._values.length - 1;
            if (lastIndex != toDeleteIndex) {
                bytes32 lastValue = set._values[lastIndex];
                // Move the last value to the index where the value to delete is
                set._values[toDeleteIndex] = lastValue;
                // Update the index for the moved value
                set._indexes[lastValue] = valueIndex; // Replace lastValue's index to valueIndex
            }
            // Delete the slot where the moved value was stored
            set._values.pop();
            // Delete the index for the deleted slot
            delete set._indexes[value];
            return true;
        } else {
            return false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the value is in the set. O(1).
     */
    function _contains(Set storage set, bytes32 value) private view returns (bool) {
        return set._indexes[value] != 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of values on the set. O(1).
     */
    function _length(Set storage set) private view returns (uint256) {
        return set._values.length;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the value stored at position `index` in the set. O(1).
     *
     * Note that there are no guarantees on the ordering of values inside the
     * array, and it may change when more values are added or removed.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `index` must be strictly less than {length}.
     */
    function _at(Set storage set, uint256 index) private view returns (bytes32) {
        return set._values[index];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the entire set in an array
     *
     * WARNING: This operation will copy the entire storage to memory, which can be quite expensive. This is designed
     * to mostly be used by view accessors that are queried without any gas fees. Developers should keep in mind that
     * this function has an unbounded cost, and using it as part of a state-changing function may render the function
     * uncallable if the set grows to a point where copying to memory consumes too much gas to fit in a block.
     */
    function _values(Set storage set) private view returns (bytes32[] memory) {
        return set._values;
    }
    // Bytes32Set
    struct Bytes32Set {
        Set _inner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a value to a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was added to the set, that is if it was not
     * already present.
     */
    function add(Bytes32Set storage set, bytes32 value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _add(set._inner, value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes a value from a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was removed from the set, that is if it was
     * present.
     */
    function remove(Bytes32Set storage set, bytes32 value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _remove(set._inner, value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the value is in the set. O(1).
     */
    function contains(Bytes32Set storage set, bytes32 value) internal view returns (bool) {
        return _contains(set._inner, value);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of values in the set. O(1).
     */
    function length(Bytes32Set storage set) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return _length(set._inner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the value stored at position `index` in the set. O(1).
     *
     * Note that there are no guarantees on the ordering of values inside the
     * array, and it may change when more values are added or removed.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `index` must be strictly less than {length}.
     */
    function at(Bytes32Set storage set, uint256 index) internal view returns (bytes32) {
        return _at(set._inner, index);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the entire set in an array
     *
     * WARNING: This operation will copy the entire storage to memory, which can be quite expensive. This is designed
     * to mostly be used by view accessors that are queried without any gas fees. Developers should keep in mind that
     * this function has an unbounded cost, and using it as part of a state-changing function may render the function
     * uncallable if the set grows to a point where copying to memory consumes too much gas to fit in a block.
     */
    function values(Bytes32Set storage set) internal view returns (bytes32[] memory) {
        bytes32[] memory store = _values(set._inner);
        bytes32[] memory result;
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            result := store
        }
        return result;
    }
    // AddressSet
    struct AddressSet {
        Set _inner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a value to a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was added to the set, that is if it was not
     * already present.
     */
    function add(AddressSet storage set, address value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _add(set._inner, bytes32(uint256(uint160(value))));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes a value from a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was removed from the set, that is if it was
     * present.
     */
    function remove(AddressSet storage set, address value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _remove(set._inner, bytes32(uint256(uint160(value))));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the value is in the set. O(1).
     */
    function contains(AddressSet storage set, address value) internal view returns (bool) {
        return _contains(set._inner, bytes32(uint256(uint160(value))));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of values in the set. O(1).
     */
    function length(AddressSet storage set) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return _length(set._inner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the value stored at position `index` in the set. O(1).
     *
     * Note that there are no guarantees on the ordering of values inside the
     * array, and it may change when more values are added or removed.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `index` must be strictly less than {length}.
     */
    function at(AddressSet storage set, uint256 index) internal view returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(uint256(_at(set._inner, index))));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the entire set in an array
     *
     * WARNING: This operation will copy the entire storage to memory, which can be quite expensive. This is designed
     * to mostly be used by view accessors that are queried without any gas fees. Developers should keep in mind that
     * this function has an unbounded cost, and using it as part of a state-changing function may render the function
     * uncallable if the set grows to a point where copying to memory consumes too much gas to fit in a block.
     */
    function values(AddressSet storage set) internal view returns (address[] memory) {
        bytes32[] memory store = _values(set._inner);
        address[] memory result;
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            result := store
        }
        return result;
    }
    // UintSet
    struct UintSet {
        Set _inner;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Add a value to a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was added to the set, that is if it was not
     * already present.
     */
    function add(UintSet storage set, uint256 value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _add(set._inner, bytes32(value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Removes a value from a set. O(1).
     *
     * Returns true if the value was removed from the set, that is if it was
     * present.
     */
    function remove(UintSet storage set, uint256 value) internal returns (bool) {
        return _remove(set._inner, bytes32(value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the value is in the set. O(1).
     */
    function contains(UintSet storage set, uint256 value) internal view returns (bool) {
        return _contains(set._inner, bytes32(value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of values in the set. O(1).
     */
    function length(UintSet storage set) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return _length(set._inner);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the value stored at position `index` in the set. O(1).
     *
     * Note that there are no guarantees on the ordering of values inside the
     * array, and it may change when more values are added or removed.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `index` must be strictly less than {length}.
     */
    function at(UintSet storage set, uint256 index) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return uint256(_at(set._inner, index));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Return the entire set in an array
     *
     * WARNING: This operation will copy the entire storage to memory, which can be quite expensive. This is designed
     * to mostly be used by view accessors that are queried without any gas fees. Developers should keep in mind that
     * this function has an unbounded cost, and using it as part of a state-changing function may render the function
     * uncallable if the set grows to a point where copying to memory consumes too much gas to fit in a block.
     */
    function values(UintSet storage set) internal view returns (uint256[] memory) {
        bytes32[] memory store = _values(set._inner);
        uint256[] memory result;
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            result := store
        }
        return result;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
import {EnumerableSet} from "openzeppelin-contracts/utils/structs/EnumerableSet.sol";
interface IOperatorFilterRegistry {
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function register(address registrant) external;
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external;
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function updateOperator(address registrant, address operator, bool filtered) external;
    function updateOperators(address registrant, address[] calldata operators, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHash(address registrant, bytes32 codehash, bool filtered) external;
    function updateCodeHashes(address registrant, bytes32[] calldata codeHashes, bool filtered) external;
    function subscribe(address registrant, address registrantToSubscribe) external;
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external;
    function subscriptionOf(address addr) external returns (address registrant);
    function subscribers(address registrant) external returns (address[] memory);
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external returns (bool);
    function filteredOperators(address addr) external returns (address[] memory);
    function filteredCodeHashes(address addr) external returns (bytes32[] memory);
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (bytes32);
    function isRegistered(address addr) external returns (bool);
    function codeHashOf(address addr) external returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
import {IOperatorFilterRegistry} from "./IOperatorFilterRegistry.sol";
import {Ownable} from "openzeppelin-contracts/access/Ownable.sol";
import {EnumerableSet} from "openzeppelin-contracts/utils/structs/EnumerableSet.sol";
import {OperatorFilterRegistryErrorsAndEvents} from "./OperatorFilterRegistryErrorsAndEvents.sol";
/**
 * @title  OperatorFilterRegistry
 * @notice Borrows heavily from the QQL BlacklistOperatorFilter contract:
 *         https://github.com/qql-art/contracts/blob/main/contracts/BlacklistOperatorFilter.sol
 * @notice This contracts allows tokens or token owners to register specific addresses or codeHashes that may be
 * *       restricted according to the isOperatorAllowed function.
 */
contract OperatorFilterRegistry is IOperatorFilterRegistry, OperatorFilterRegistryErrorsAndEvents {
    using EnumerableSet for EnumerableSet.AddressSet;
    using EnumerableSet for EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set;
    /// @dev initialized accounts have a nonzero codehash (see https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1052)
    /// Note that this will also be a smart contract's codehash when making calls from its constructor.
    bytes32 constant EOA_CODEHASH = keccak256("");
    mapping(address => EnumerableSet.AddressSet) private _filteredOperators;
    mapping(address => EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set) private _filteredCodeHashes;
    mapping(address => address) private _registrations;
    mapping(address => EnumerableSet.AddressSet) private _subscribers;
    /**
     * @notice restricts method caller to the address or EIP-173 "owner()"
     */
    modifier onlyAddressOrOwner(address addr) {
        if (msg.sender != addr) {
            try Ownable(addr).owner() returns (address owner) {
                if (msg.sender != owner) {
                    revert OnlyAddressOrOwner();
                }
            } catch (bytes memory reason) {
                if (reason.length == 0) {
                    revert NotOwnable();
                } else {
                    /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                    assembly {
                        revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if operator is not filtered for a given token, either by address or codeHash. Also returns
     *         true if supplied registrant address is not registered.
     */
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != address(0)) {
            EnumerableSet.AddressSet storage filteredOperatorsRef;
            EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set storage filteredCodeHashesRef;
            filteredOperatorsRef = _filteredOperators[registration];
            filteredCodeHashesRef = _filteredCodeHashes[registration];
            if (filteredOperatorsRef.contains(operator)) {
                revert AddressFiltered(operator);
            }
            if (operator.code.length > 0) {
                bytes32 codeHash = operator.codehash;
                if (filteredCodeHashesRef.contains(codeHash)) {
                    revert CodeHashFiltered(operator, codeHash);
                }
            }
        }
        return true;
    }
    //////////////////
    // AUTH METHODS //
    //////////////////
    /**
     * @notice Registers an address with the registry. May be called by address itself or by EIP-173 owner.
     */
    function register(address registrant) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        if (_registrations[registrant] != address(0)) {
            revert AlreadyRegistered();
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = registrant;
        emit RegistrationUpdated(registrant, true);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Unregisters an address with the registry and removes its subscription. May be called by address itself or by EIP-173 owner.
     *         Note that this does not remove any filtered addresses or codeHashes.
     *         Also note that any subscriptions to this registrant will still be active and follow the existing filtered addresses and codehashes.
     */
    function unregister(address registrant) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            _subscribers[registration].remove(registrant);
            emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, registration, false);
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = address(0);
        emit RegistrationUpdated(registrant, false);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Registers an address with the registry and "subscribes" to another address's filtered operators and codeHashes.
     */
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != address(0)) {
            revert AlreadyRegistered();
        }
        if (registrant == subscription) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToSelf();
        }
        address subscriptionRegistration = _registrations[subscription];
        if (subscriptionRegistration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(subscription);
        }
        if (subscriptionRegistration != subscription) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToRegistrantWithSubscription(subscription);
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = subscription;
        _subscribers[subscription].add(registrant);
        emit RegistrationUpdated(registrant, true);
        emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, subscription, true);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Registers an address with the registry and copies the filtered operators and codeHashes from another
     *         address without subscribing.
     */
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        if (registrantToCopy == registrant) {
            revert CannotCopyFromSelf();
        }
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != address(0)) {
            revert AlreadyRegistered();
        }
        address registrantRegistration = _registrations[registrantToCopy];
        if (registrantRegistration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrantToCopy);
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = registrant;
        emit RegistrationUpdated(registrant, true);
        _copyEntries(registrant, registrantToCopy);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update an operator address for a registered address - when filtered is true, the operator is filtered.
     */
    function updateOperator(address registrant, address operator, bool filtered)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        EnumerableSet.AddressSet storage filteredOperatorsRef = _filteredOperators[registrant];
        if (!filtered) {
            bool removed = filteredOperatorsRef.remove(operator);
            if (!removed) {
                revert AddressNotFiltered(operator);
            }
        } else {
            bool added = filteredOperatorsRef.add(operator);
            if (!added) {
                revert AddressAlreadyFiltered(operator);
            }
        }
        emit OperatorUpdated(registrant, operator, filtered);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update a codeHash for a registered address - when filtered is true, the codeHash is filtered.
     */
    function updateCodeHash(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash, bool filtered)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        if (codeHash == EOA_CODEHASH) {
            revert CannotFilterEOAs();
        }
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set storage filteredCodeHashesRef = _filteredCodeHashes[registrant];
        if (!filtered) {
            bool removed = filteredCodeHashesRef.remove(codeHash);
            if (!removed) {
                revert CodeHashNotFiltered(codeHash);
            }
        } else {
            bool added = filteredCodeHashesRef.add(codeHash);
            if (!added) {
                revert CodeHashAlreadyFiltered(codeHash);
            }
        }
        emit CodeHashUpdated(registrant, codeHash, filtered);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update multiple operators for a registered address - when filtered is true, the operators will be filtered. Reverts on duplicates.
     */
    function updateOperators(address registrant, address[] calldata operators, bool filtered)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        EnumerableSet.AddressSet storage filteredOperatorsRef = _filteredOperators[registrant];
        uint256 operatorsLength = operators.length;
        unchecked {
            if (!filtered) {
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < operatorsLength; ++i) {
                    address operator = operators[i];
                    bool removed = filteredOperatorsRef.remove(operator);
                    if (!removed) {
                        revert AddressNotFiltered(operator);
                    }
                }
            } else {
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < operatorsLength; ++i) {
                    address operator = operators[i];
                    bool added = filteredOperatorsRef.add(operator);
                    if (!added) {
                        revert AddressAlreadyFiltered(operator);
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit OperatorsUpdated(registrant, operators, filtered);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Update multiple codeHashes for a registered address - when filtered is true, the codeHashes will be filtered. Reverts on duplicates.
     */
    function updateCodeHashes(address registrant, bytes32[] calldata codeHashes, bool filtered)
        external
        onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant)
    {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set storage filteredCodeHashesRef = _filteredCodeHashes[registrant];
        uint256 codeHashesLength = codeHashes.length;
        unchecked {
            if (!filtered) {
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < codeHashesLength; ++i) {
                    bytes32 codeHash = codeHashes[i];
                    bool removed = filteredCodeHashesRef.remove(codeHash);
                    if (!removed) {
                        revert CodeHashNotFiltered(codeHash);
                    }
                }
            } else {
                for (uint256 i = 0; i < codeHashesLength; ++i) {
                    bytes32 codeHash = codeHashes[i];
                    if (codeHash == EOA_CODEHASH) {
                        revert CannotFilterEOAs();
                    }
                    bool added = filteredCodeHashesRef.add(codeHash);
                    if (!added) {
                        revert CodeHashAlreadyFiltered(codeHash);
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit CodeHashesUpdated(registrant, codeHashes, filtered);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Subscribe an address to another registrant's filtered operators and codeHashes. Will remove previous
     *         subscription if present.
     *         Note that accounts with subscriptions may go on to subscribe to other accounts - in this case,
     *         subscriptions will not be forwarded. Instead the former subscription's existing entries will still be
     *         used.
     */
    function subscribe(address registrant, address newSubscription) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        if (registrant == newSubscription) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToSelf();
        }
        if (newSubscription == address(0)) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToZeroAddress();
        }
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration == newSubscription) {
            revert AlreadySubscribed(newSubscription);
        }
        address newSubscriptionRegistration = _registrations[newSubscription];
        if (newSubscriptionRegistration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(newSubscription);
        }
        if (newSubscriptionRegistration != newSubscription) {
            revert CannotSubscribeToRegistrantWithSubscription(newSubscription);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            _subscribers[registration].remove(registrant);
            emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, registration, false);
        }
        _registrations[registrant] = newSubscription;
        _subscribers[newSubscription].add(registrant);
        emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, newSubscription, true);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Unsubscribe an address from its current subscribed registrant, and optionally copy its filtered operators and codeHashes.
     */
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration == registrant) {
            revert NotSubscribed();
        }
        _subscribers[registration].remove(registrant);
        _registrations[registrant] = registrant;
        emit SubscriptionUpdated(registrant, registration, false);
        if (copyExistingEntries) {
            _copyEntries(registrant, registration);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Copy filtered operators and codeHashes from a different registrantToCopy to addr.
     */
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external onlyAddressOrOwner(registrant) {
        if (registrant == registrantToCopy) {
            revert CannotCopyFromSelf();
        }
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        }
        if (registration != registrant) {
            revert CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(registration);
        }
        address registrantRegistration = _registrations[registrantToCopy];
        if (registrantRegistration == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrantToCopy);
        }
        _copyEntries(registrant, registrantToCopy);
    }
    /// @dev helper to copy entries from registrantToCopy to registrant and emit events
    function _copyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) private {
        EnumerableSet.AddressSet storage filteredOperatorsRef = _filteredOperators[registrantToCopy];
        EnumerableSet.Bytes32Set storage filteredCodeHashesRef = _filteredCodeHashes[registrantToCopy];
        uint256 filteredOperatorsLength = filteredOperatorsRef.length();
        uint256 filteredCodeHashesLength = filteredCodeHashesRef.length();
        unchecked {
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < filteredOperatorsLength; ++i) {
                address operator = filteredOperatorsRef.at(i);
                bool added = _filteredOperators[registrant].add(operator);
                if (added) {
                    emit OperatorUpdated(registrant, operator, true);
                }
            }
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < filteredCodeHashesLength; ++i) {
                bytes32 codehash = filteredCodeHashesRef.at(i);
                bool added = _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].add(codehash);
                if (added) {
                    emit CodeHashUpdated(registrant, codehash, true);
                }
            }
        }
    }
    //////////////////
    // VIEW METHODS //
    //////////////////
    /**
     * @notice Get the subscription address of a given registrant, if any.
     */
    function subscriptionOf(address registrant) external view returns (address subscription) {
        subscription = _registrations[registrant];
        if (subscription == address(0)) {
            revert NotRegistered(registrant);
        } else if (subscription == registrant) {
            subscription = address(0);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @notice Get the set of addresses subscribed to a given registrant.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function subscribers(address registrant) external view returns (address[] memory) {
        return _subscribers[registrant].values();
    }
    /**
     * @notice Get the subscriber at a given index in the set of addresses subscribed to a given registrant.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external view returns (address) {
        return _subscribers[registrant].at(index);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if operator is filtered by a given address or its subscription.
     */
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredOperators[registration].contains(operator);
        }
        return _filteredOperators[registrant].contains(operator);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if a codeHash is filtered by a given address or its subscription.
     */
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external view returns (bool) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredCodeHashes[registration].contains(codeHash);
        }
        return _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].contains(codeHash);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if the hash of an address's code is filtered by a given address or its subscription.
     */
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external view returns (bool) {
        bytes32 codeHash = operatorWithCode.codehash;
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredCodeHashes[registration].contains(codeHash);
        }
        return _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].contains(codeHash);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns true if an address has registered
     */
    function isRegistered(address registrant) external view returns (bool) {
        return _registrations[registrant] != address(0);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns a list of filtered operators for a given address or its subscription.
     */
    function filteredOperators(address registrant) external view returns (address[] memory) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredOperators[registration].values();
        }
        return _filteredOperators[registrant].values();
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns the set of filtered codeHashes for a given address or its subscription.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function filteredCodeHashes(address registrant) external view returns (bytes32[] memory) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredCodeHashes[registration].values();
        }
        return _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].values();
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns the filtered operator at the given index of the set of filtered operators for a given address or
     *         its subscription.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external view returns (address) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredOperators[registration].at(index);
        }
        return _filteredOperators[registrant].at(index);
    }
    /**
     * @notice Returns the filtered codeHash at the given index of the list of filtered codeHashes for a given address or
     *         its subscription.
     *         Note that order is not guaranteed as updates are made.
     */
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external view returns (bytes32) {
        address registration = _registrations[registrant];
        if (registration != registrant) {
            return _filteredCodeHashes[registration].at(index);
        }
        return _filteredCodeHashes[registrant].at(index);
    }
    /// @dev Convenience method to compute the code hash of an arbitrary contract
    function codeHashOf(address a) external view returns (bytes32) {
        return a.codehash;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.13;
contract OperatorFilterRegistryErrorsAndEvents {
    error CannotFilterEOAs();
    error AddressAlreadyFiltered(address operator);
    error AddressNotFiltered(address operator);
    error CodeHashAlreadyFiltered(bytes32 codeHash);
    error CodeHashNotFiltered(bytes32 codeHash);
    error OnlyAddressOrOwner();
    error NotRegistered(address registrant);
    error AlreadyRegistered();
    error AlreadySubscribed(address subscription);
    error NotSubscribed();
    error CannotUpdateWhileSubscribed(address subscription);
    error CannotSubscribeToSelf();
    error CannotSubscribeToZeroAddress();
    error NotOwnable();
    error AddressFiltered(address filtered);
    error CodeHashFiltered(address account, bytes32 codeHash);
    error CannotSubscribeToRegistrantWithSubscription(address registrant);
    error CannotCopyFromSelf();
    event RegistrationUpdated(address indexed registrant, bool indexed registered);
    event OperatorUpdated(address indexed registrant, address indexed operator, bool indexed filtered);
    event OperatorsUpdated(address indexed registrant, address[] operators, bool indexed filtered);
    event CodeHashUpdated(address indexed registrant, bytes32 indexed codeHash, bool indexed filtered);
    event CodeHashesUpdated(address indexed registrant, bytes32[] codeHashes, bool indexed filtered);
    event SubscriptionUpdated(address indexed registrant, address indexed subscription, bool indexed subscribed);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.11;
/// @author thirdweb
//   $$\\     $$\\       $$\\                 $$\\                         $$\\
//   $$ |    $$ |      \\__|                $$ |                        $$ |
// $$$$$$\\   $$$$$$$\\  $$\\  $$$$$$\\   $$$$$$$ |$$\\  $$\\  $$\\  $$$$$$\\  $$$$$$$\\
// \\_$$  _|  $$  __$$\\ $$ |$$  __$$\\ $$  __$$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$  __$$\\ $$  __$$\\
//   $$ |    $$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |  \\__|$$ /  $$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$$$$$$$ |$$ |  $$ |
//   $$ |$$\\ $$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |      $$ |  $$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$   ____|$$ |  $$ |
//   \\$$$$  |$$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |      \\$$$$$$$ |\\$$$$$\\$$$$  |\\$$$$$$$\\ $$$$$$$  |
//    \\____/ \\__|  \\__|\\__|\\__|       \\_______| \\_____\\____/  \\_______|\\_______/
//  ==========  External imports    ==========
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/StringsUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/interfaces/IERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "./eip/queryable/ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol";
//  ==========  Internal imports    ==========
import "./openzeppelin-presets/metatx/ERC2771ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "./lib/CurrencyTransferLib.sol";
//  ==========  Features    ==========
import "./extension/Multicall.sol";
import "./extension/ContractMetadata.sol";
import "./extension/Royalty.sol";
import "./extension/PrimarySale.sol";
import "./extension/Ownable.sol";
import "./extension/SharedMetadata.sol";
import "./extension/PermissionsEnumerable.sol";
import "./extension/Drop.sol";
// OpenSea operator filter
import "./extension/DefaultOperatorFiltererUpgradeable.sol";
contract OpenEditionERC721 is
    Initializable,
    ContractMetadata,
    Royalty,
    PrimarySale,
    Ownable,
    SharedMetadata,
    PermissionsEnumerable,
    Drop,
    ERC2771ContextUpgradeable,
    Multicall,
    DefaultOperatorFiltererUpgradeable,
    ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable
{
    using StringsUpgradeable for uint256;
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            State variables
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev Only transfers to or from TRANSFER_ROLE holders are valid, when transfers are restricted.
    bytes32 private transferRole;
    /// @dev Only MINTER_ROLE holders can update the shared metadata of tokens.
    bytes32 private minterRole;
    /// @dev Max bps in the thirdweb system.
    uint256 private constant MAX_BPS = 10_000;
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                    Constructor + initializer logic
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    constructor() initializer {}
    /// @dev Initiliazes the contract, like a constructor.
    function initialize(
        address _defaultAdmin,
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _contractURI,
        address[] memory _trustedForwarders,
        address _saleRecipient,
        address _royaltyRecipient,
        uint128 _royaltyBps
    ) external initializerERC721A initializer {
        bytes32 _transferRole = keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE");
        bytes32 _minterRole = keccak256("MINTER_ROLE");
        // Initialize inherited contracts, most base-like -> most derived.
        __ERC2771Context_init(_trustedForwarders);
        __ERC721A_init(_name, _symbol);
        __DefaultOperatorFilterer_init();
        _setupContractURI(_contractURI);
        _setupOwner(_defaultAdmin);
        _setOperatorRestriction(true);
        _setupRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _defaultAdmin);
        _setupRole(_minterRole, _defaultAdmin);
        _setupRole(_transferRole, _defaultAdmin);
        _setupRole(_transferRole, address(0));
        _setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo(_royaltyRecipient, _royaltyBps);
        _setupPrimarySaleRecipient(_saleRecipient);
        transferRole = _transferRole;
        minterRole = _minterRole;
    }
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                        ERC 165 / 721 / 2981 logic
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev Returns the URI for a given tokenId.
    function tokenURI(uint256 _tokenId)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        returns (string memory)
    {
        if (!_exists(_tokenId)) {
            revert("!ID");
        }
        return _getURIFromSharedMetadata(_tokenId);
    }
    /// @dev See ERC 165
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC165, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return super.supportsInterface(interfaceId) || type(IERC2981Upgradeable).interfaceId == interfaceId;
    }
    /// @dev The start token ID for the contract.
    function _startTokenId() internal pure override returns (uint256) {
        return 1;
    }
    function startTokenId() public pure returns (uint256) {
        return _startTokenId();
    }
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                        Internal functions
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev Collects and distributes the primary sale value of NFTs being claimed.
    function _collectPriceOnClaim(
        address _primarySaleRecipient,
        uint256 _quantityToClaim,
        address _currency,
        uint256 _pricePerToken
    ) internal override {
        if (_pricePerToken == 0) {
            return;
        }
        uint256 totalPrice = _quantityToClaim * _pricePerToken;
        bool validMsgValue;
        if (_currency == CurrencyTransferLib.NATIVE_TOKEN) {
            validMsgValue = msg.value == totalPrice;
        } else {
            validMsgValue = msg.value == 0;
        }
        require(validMsgValue, "!V");
        address saleRecipient = _primarySaleRecipient == address(0) ? primarySaleRecipient() : _primarySaleRecipient;
        CurrencyTransferLib.transferCurrency(_currency, _msgSender(), saleRecipient, totalPrice);
    }
    /// @dev Transfers the NFTs being claimed.
    function _transferTokensOnClaim(address _to, uint256 _quantityBeingClaimed)
        internal
        override
        returns (uint256 startTokenId_)
    {
        startTokenId_ = _nextTokenId();
        _safeMint(_to, _quantityBeingClaimed);
    }
    /// @dev Checks whether primary sale recipient can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetPrimarySaleRecipient() internal view override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    /// @dev Checks whether owner can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetOwner() internal view override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    /// @dev Checks whether royalty info can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetRoyaltyInfo() internal view override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    /// @dev Checks whether contract metadata can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetContractURI() internal view override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    /// @dev Checks whether platform fee info can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetClaimConditions() internal view override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether the shared metadata of tokens can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetSharedMetadata() internal view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(minterRole, _msgSender());
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether operator restriction can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetOperatorRestriction() internal virtual override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                        Miscellaneous
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /**
     * Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function totalMinted() external view returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            return _nextTokenId() - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /// @dev The tokenId of the next NFT that will be minted / lazy minted.
    function nextTokenIdToMint() external view returns (uint256) {
        return _nextTokenId();
    }
    /// @dev The next token ID of the NFT that can be claimed.
    function nextTokenIdToClaim() external view returns (uint256) {
        return _nextTokenId();
    }
    /// @dev Burns `tokenId`. See {ERC721-_burn}.
    function burn(uint256 tokenId) external virtual {
        // note: ERC721AUpgradeable's `_burn(uint256,bool)` internally checks for token approvals.
        _burn(tokenId, true);
    }
    /// @dev See {ERC721-_beforeTokenTransfer}.
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId_,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual override {
        super._beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, startTokenId_, quantity);
        // if transfer is restricted on the contract, we still want to allow burning and minting
        if (!hasRole(transferRole, address(0)) && from != address(0) && to != address(0)) {
            if (!hasRole(transferRole, from) && !hasRole(transferRole, to)) {
                revert("!T");
            }
        }
    }
    /// @dev See {ERC721-setApprovalForAll}.
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved)
        public
        override(IERC721AUpgradeable, ERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.setApprovalForAll(operator, approved);
    }
    /// @dev See {ERC721-approve}.
    function approve(address operator, uint256 tokenId)
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.approve(operator, tokenId);
    }
    /// @dev See {ERC721-_transferFrom}.
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable) onlyAllowedOperator(from) {
        super.transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    /// @dev See {ERC721-_safeTransferFrom}.
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable) onlyAllowedOperator(from) {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    /// @dev See {ERC721-_safeTransferFrom}.
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory data
    ) public payable override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable) onlyAllowedOperator(from) {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, data);
    }
    function _dropMsgSender() internal view virtual override returns (address) {
        return _msgSender();
    }
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual override returns (address) {
        return _msgSender();
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual override(ERC2771ContextUpgradeable) returns (address sender) {
        return ERC2771ContextUpgradeable._msgSender();
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual override(ERC2771ContextUpgradeable) returns (bytes calldata) {
        return ERC2771ContextUpgradeable._msgData();
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * [EIP](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165).
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @title ERC20 interface
 * @dev see https://github.com/ethereum/EIPs/issues/20
 */
interface IERC20 {
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    function balanceOf(address who) external view returns (uint256);
    function allowance(address owner, address spender) external view returns (uint256);
    function transfer(address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
    function approve(address spender, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) external returns (bool);
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 value);
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed spender, uint256 value);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IERC165.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
interface IERC2981 is IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be payed in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.11;
import "./IERC165.sol";
import "./IERC721.sol";
interface IERC4906 is IERC165 {
    /// @dev This event emits when the metadata of a token is changed.
    /// So that the third-party platforms such as NFT market could
    /// timely update the images and related attributes of the NFT.
    event MetadataUpdate(uint256 _tokenId);
    /// @dev This event emits when the metadata of a range of tokens is changed.
    /// So that the third-party platforms such as NFT market could
    /// timely update the images and related attributes of the NFTs.
    event BatchMetadataUpdate(uint256 _fromTokenId, uint256 _toTokenId);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC721/IERC721.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Required interface of an ERC721 compliant contract.
 */
interface IERC721 {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in ``owner``'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address);
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`, checking first that contract recipients
     * are aware of the ERC721 protocol to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external;
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom} whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external;
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address);
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom} for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import "./IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol";
import "./ERC721AUpgradeable.sol";
import "./ERC721A__Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @title ERC721AQueryable.
 *
 * @dev ERC721A subclass with convenience query functions.
 */
abstract contract ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is
    ERC721A__Initializable,
    ERC721AUpgradeable,
    IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable
{
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership)
    {
        unchecked {
            if (tokenId >= _startTokenId()) {
                if (tokenId < _nextTokenId()) {
                    // If the `tokenId` is within bounds,
                    // scan backwards for the initialized ownership slot.
                    while (!_ownershipIsInitialized(tokenId)) --tokenId;
                    return _ownershipAt(tokenId);
                }
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        return _tokensOfOwnerIn(owner, start, stop);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        uint256 start = _startTokenId();
        uint256 stop = _nextTokenId();
        uint256[] memory tokenIds;
        if (start != stop) tokenIds = _tokensOfOwnerIn(owner, start, stop);
        return tokenIds;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Helper function for returning an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * Note that this function is optimized for smaller bytecode size over runtime gas,
     * since it is meant to be called off-chain.
     */
    function _tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) private view returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            if (start >= stop) _revert(InvalidQueryRange.selector);
            // Set `start = max(start, _startTokenId())`.
            if (start < _startTokenId()) {
                start = _startTokenId();
            }
            uint256 stopLimit = _nextTokenId();
            // Set `stop = min(stop, stopLimit)`.
            if (stop >= stopLimit) {
                stop = stopLimit;
            }
            uint256[] memory tokenIds;
            uint256 tokenIdsMaxLength = balanceOf(owner);
            bool startLtStop = start < stop;
            assembly {
                // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength` to zero if `start` is less than `stop`.
                tokenIdsMaxLength := mul(tokenIdsMaxLength, startLtStop)
            }
            if (tokenIdsMaxLength != 0) {
                // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength = min(balanceOf(owner), stop - start)`,
                // to cater for cases where `balanceOf(owner)` is too big.
                if (stop - start <= tokenIdsMaxLength) {
                    tokenIdsMaxLength = stop - start;
                }
                assembly {
                    // Grab the free memory pointer.
                    tokenIds := mload(0x40)
                    // Allocate one word for the length, and `tokenIdsMaxLength` words
                    // for the data. `shl(5, x)` is equivalent to `mul(32, x)`.
                    mstore(0x40, add(tokenIds, shl(5, add(tokenIdsMaxLength, 1))))
                }
                // We need to call `explicitOwnershipOf(start)`,
                // because the slot at `start` may not be initialized.
                TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(start);
                address currOwnershipAddr;
                // If the starting slot exists (i.e. not burned),
                // initialize `currOwnershipAddr`.
                // `ownership.address` will not be zero,
                // as `start` is clamped to the valid token ID range.
                if (!ownership.burned) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
                // Use a do-while, which is slightly more efficient for this case,
                // as the array will at least contain one element.
                do {
                    ownership = _ownershipAt(start);
                    assembly {
                        switch mload(add(ownership, 0x40))
                        // if `ownership.burned == false`.
                        case 0 {
                            // if `ownership.addr != address(0)`.
                            // The `addr` already has it's upper 96 bits clearned,
                            // since it is written to memory with regular Solidity.
                            if mload(ownership) {
                                currOwnershipAddr := mload(ownership)
                            }
                            // if `currOwnershipAddr == owner`.
                            // The `shl(96, x)` is to make the comparison agnostic to any
                            // dirty upper 96 bits in `owner`.
                            if iszero(shl(96, xor(currOwnershipAddr, owner))) {
                                tokenIdsIdx := add(tokenIdsIdx, 1)
                                mstore(add(tokenIds, shl(5, tokenIdsIdx)), start)
                            }
                        }
                        // Otherwise, reset `currOwnershipAddr`.
                        // This handles the case of batch burned tokens
                        // (burned bit of first slot set, remaining slots left uninitialized).
                        default {
                            currOwnershipAddr := 0
                        }
                        start := add(start, 1)
                    }
                } while (!(start == stop || tokenIdsIdx == tokenIdsMaxLength));
                // Store the length of the array.
                assembly {
                    mstore(tokenIds, tokenIdsIdx)
                }
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
library ERC721AStorage {
    // Bypass for a `--via-ir` bug (https://github.com/chiru-labs/ERC721A/pull/364).
    struct TokenApprovalRef {
        address value;
    }
    struct Layout {
        // =============================================================
        //                            STORAGE
        // =============================================================
        // The next token ID to be minted.
        uint256 _currentIndex;
        // The number of tokens burned.
        uint256 _burnCounter;
        // Token name
        string _name;
        // Token symbol
        string _symbol;
        // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
        // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned.
        // See {_packedOwnershipOf} implementation for details.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..159]   `addr`
        // - [160..223] `startTimestamp`
        // - [224]      `burned`
        // - [225]      `nextInitialized`
        // - [232..255] `extraData`
        mapping(uint256 => uint256) _packedOwnerships;
        // Mapping owner address to address data.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..63]    `balance`
        // - [64..127]  `numberMinted`
        // - [128..191] `numberBurned`
        // - [192..255] `aux`
        mapping(address => uint256) _packedAddressData;
        // Mapping from token ID to approved address.
        mapping(uint256 => ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef) _tokenApprovals;
        // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
        mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) _operatorApprovals;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256("ERC721A.contracts.storage.ERC721A");
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import "./IERC721AUpgradeable.sol";
import { ERC721AStorage } from "./ERC721AStorage.sol";
import "./ERC721A__Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721 token receiver.
 */
interface ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable {
    function onERC721Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}
/**
 * @title ERC721A
 *
 * @dev Implementation of the [ERC721](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721)
 * Non-Fungible Token Standard, including the Metadata extension.
 * Optimized for lower gas during batch mints.
 *
 * Token IDs are minted in sequential order (e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3, ...)
 * starting from `_startTokenId()`.
 *
 * Assumptions:
 *
 * - An owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
 * - The maximum token ID cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
 */
contract ERC721AUpgradeable is ERC721A__Initializable, IERC721AUpgradeable {
    using ERC721AStorage for ERC721AStorage.Layout;
    // =============================================================
    //                           CONSTANTS
    // =============================================================
    // Mask of an entry in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY = (1 << 64) - 1;
    // The bit position of `numberMinted` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED = 64;
    // The bit position of `numberBurned` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED = 128;
    // The bit position of `aux` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_AUX = 192;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in packed address data except the 64 bits for `aux`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 192) - 1;
    // The bit position of `startTimestamp` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP = 160;
    // The bit mask of the `burned` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_BURNED = 1 << 224;
    // The bit position of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 225;
    // The bit mask of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 1 << 225;
    // The bit position of `extraData` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA = 232;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in a packed ownership except the 24 bits for `extraData`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 232) - 1;
    // The mask of the lower 160 bits for addresses.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS = (1 << 160) - 1;
    // The maximum `quantity` that can be minted with {_mintERC2309}.
    // This limit is to prevent overflows on the address data entries.
    // For a limit of 5000, a total of 3.689e15 calls to {_mintERC2309}
    // is required to cause an overflow, which is unrealistic.
    uint256 private constant _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT = 5000;
    // The `Transfer` event signature is given by:
    // `keccak256(bytes("Transfer(address,address,uint256)"))`.
    bytes32 private constant _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE =
        0xddf252ad1be2c89b69c2b068fc378daa952ba7f163c4a11628f55a4df523b3ef;
    // =============================================================
    //                          CONSTRUCTOR
    // =============================================================
    function __ERC721A_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
    }
    function __ERC721A_init_unchained(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._name = name_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol = symbol_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = _startTokenId();
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                   TOKEN COUNTING OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the starting token ID.
     * To change the starting token ID, please override this function.
     */
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next token ID to be minted.
     */
    function _nextTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as _burnCounter cannot be incremented
        // more than `_currentIndex - _startTokenId()` times.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function _totalMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_currentIndex` does not decrement,
        // and it is initialized to `_startTokenId()`.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens burned.
     */
    function _totalBurned() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                    ADDRESS DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        if (owner == address(0)) _revert(BalanceQueryForZeroAddress.selector);
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
     */
    function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
     */
    function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     */
    function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
        return uint64(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_AUX);
    }
    /**
     * Sets the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
     */
    function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner];
        uint256 auxCasted;
        // Cast `aux` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            auxCasted := aux
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT) | (auxCasted << _BITPOS_AUX);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] = packed;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        // The interface IDs are constants representing the first 4 bytes
        // of the XOR of all function selectors in the interface.
        // See: [ERC165](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165)
        // (e.g. `bytes4(i.functionA.selector ^ i.functionB.selector ^ ...)`)
        return
            interfaceId == 0x01ffc9a7 || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC165.
            interfaceId == 0x80ac58cd || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721.
            interfaceId == 0x5b5e139f; // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721Metadata.
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._name;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) _revert(URIQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
        string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
        return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, _toString(tokenId))) : "";
    }
    /**
     * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
     * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
     * by default, it can be overridden in child contracts.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
        return "";
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     OWNERSHIPS OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId)));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
     * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around over time.
     */
    function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct at `index`.
     */
    function _ownershipAt(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index]);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether the ownership slot at `index` is initialized.
     * An uninitialized slot does not necessarily mean that the slot has no owner.
     */
    function _ownershipIsInitialized(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] != 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the ownership slot minted at `index` for efficiency purposes.
     */
    function _initializeOwnershipAt(uint256 index) internal virtual {
        if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] == 0) {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = _packedOwnershipOf(index);
        }
    }
    /**
     * Returns the packed ownership data of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) private view returns (uint256 packed) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId];
            // If the data at the starting slot does not exist, start the scan.
            if (packed == 0) {
                if (tokenId >= ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
                // Invariant:
                // There will always be an initialized ownership slot
                // (i.e. `ownership.addr != address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                // before an unintialized ownership slot
                // (i.e. `ownership.addr == address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                // Hence, `tokenId` will not underflow.
                //
                // We can directly compare the packed value.
                // If the address is zero, packed will be zero.
                for (;;) {
                    unchecked {
                        packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[--tokenId];
                    }
                    if (packed == 0) continue;
                    if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) return packed;
                    // Otherwise, the token is burned, and we must revert.
                    // This handles the case of batch burned tokens, where only the burned bit
                    // of the starting slot is set, and remaining slots are left uninitialized.
                    _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
                }
            }
            // Otherwise, the data exists and we can skip the scan.
            // This is possible because we have already achieved the target condition.
            // This saves 2143 gas on transfers of initialized tokens.
            // If the token is not burned, return `packed`. Otherwise, revert.
            if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) return packed;
        }
        _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct from `packed`.
     */
    function _unpackedOwnership(uint256 packed) private pure returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership) {
        ownership.addr = address(uint160(packed));
        ownership.startTimestamp = uint64(packed >> _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP);
        ownership.burned = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED != 0;
        ownership.extraData = uint24(packed >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Packs ownership data into a single uint256.
     */
    function _packOwnershipData(address owner, uint256 flags) private view returns (uint256 result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `owner | (block.timestamp << _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP) | flags`.
            result := or(owner, or(shl(_BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP, timestamp()), flags))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `nextInitialized` flag set if `quantity` equals 1.
     */
    function _nextInitializedFlag(uint256 quantity) private pure returns (uint256 result) {
        // For branchless setting of the `nextInitialized` flag.
        assembly {
            // `(quantity == 1) << _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED`.
            result := shl(_BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED, eq(quantity, 1))
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account. See {ERC721A-_approve}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public payable virtual override {
        _approve(to, tokenId, true);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) _revert(ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[_msgSenderERC721A()][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSenderERC721A(), operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
     *
     * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Tokens start existing when they are minted. See {_mint}.
     */
    function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (bool result) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            if (tokenId < ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                uint256 packed;
                while ((packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId]) == 0) --tokenId;
                result = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `msgSender` is equal to `approvedAddress` or `owner`.
     */
    function _isSenderApprovedOrOwner(
        address approvedAddress,
        address owner,
        address msgSender
    ) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // Mask `msgSender` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            msgSender := and(msgSender, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `msgSender == owner || msgSender == approvedAddress`.
            result := or(eq(msgSender, owner), eq(msgSender, approvedAddress))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the storage slot and value for the approved address of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(uint256 tokenId)
        private
        view
        returns (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress)
    {
        ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef storage tokenApproval = ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        // The following is equivalent to `approvedAddress = _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value`.
        assembly {
            approvedAddressSlot := tokenApproval.slot
            approvedAddress := sload(approvedAddressSlot)
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      TRANSFER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        // Mask `from` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
        from = address(uint160(uint256(uint160(from)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS));
        if (address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked)) != from) _revert(TransferFromIncorrectOwner.selector);
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
        if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
            if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) _revert(TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved.selector);
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // We can directly increment and decrement the balances.
            --ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from]; // Updates: `balance -= 1`.
            ++ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to]; // Updates: `balance += 1`.
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the next owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of transfering.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED | _nextExtraData(from, to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
        uint256 toMasked = uint256(uint160(to)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS;
        assembly {
            // Emit the `Transfer` event.
            log4(
                0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                from, // `from`.
                toMasked, // `to`.
                tokenId // `tokenId`.
            )
        }
        if (toMasked == 0) _revert(TransferToZeroAddress.selector);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, "");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
        if (to.code.length != 0)
            if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
            }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called before burning one token.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * have been transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called after one token has been burned.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Private function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
     *
     * `from` - Previous owner of the given token ID.
     * `to` - Target address that will receive the token.
     * `tokenId` - Token ID to be transferred.
     * `_data` - Optional data to send along with the call.
     *
     * Returns whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value.
     */
    function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) private returns (bool) {
        try
            ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received(_msgSenderERC721A(), from, tokenId, _data)
        returns (bytes4 retval) {
            return retval == ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received.selector;
        } catch (bytes memory reason) {
            if (reason.length == 0) {
                _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
            }
            assembly {
                revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
            }
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        MINT OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (quantity == 0) _revert(MintZeroQuantity.selector);
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // `balance` and `numberMinted` have a maximum limit of 2**64.
        // `tokenId` has a maximum limit of 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            uint256 toMasked = uint256(uint160(to)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS;
            if (toMasked == 0) _revert(MintToZeroAddress.selector);
            uint256 end = startTokenId + quantity;
            uint256 tokenId = startTokenId;
            do {
                assembly {
                    // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                    log4(
                        0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                        0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                        _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                        0, // `address(0)`.
                        toMasked, // `to`.
                        tokenId // `tokenId`.
                    )
                }
                // The `!=` check ensures that large values of `quantity`
                // that overflows uint256 will make the loop run out of gas.
            } while (++tokenId != end);
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = end;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * This function is intended for efficient minting only during contract creation.
     *
     * It emits only one {ConsecutiveTransfer} as defined in
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309),
     * instead of a sequence of {Transfer} event(s).
     *
     * Calling this function outside of contract creation WILL make your contract
     * non-compliant with the ERC721 standard.
     * For full ERC721 compliance, substituting ERC721 {Transfer} event(s) with the ERC2309
     * {ConsecutiveTransfer} event is only permissible during contract creation.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {ConsecutiveTransfer} event.
     */
    function _mintERC2309(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (to == address(0)) _revert(MintToZeroAddress.selector);
        if (quantity == 0) _revert(MintZeroQuantity.selector);
        if (quantity > _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT) _revert(MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit.selector);
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are unrealistic due to the above check for `quantity` to be below the limit.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            emit ConsecutiveTransfer(startTokenId, startTokenId + quantity - 1, address(0), to);
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = startTokenId + quantity;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * See {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _safeMint(
        address to,
        uint256 quantity,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mint(to, quantity);
        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 end = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
                uint256 index = end - quantity;
                do {
                    if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, index++, _data)) {
                        _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
                    }
                } while (index < end);
                // Reentrancy protection.
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex != end) _revert(bytes4(0));
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        _safeMint(to, quantity, "");
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_approve(to, tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _approve(to, tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function _approve(
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bool approvalCheck
    ) internal virtual {
        address owner = ownerOf(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck && _msgSenderERC721A() != owner)
            if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSenderERC721A())) {
                _revert(ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved.selector);
            }
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value = to;
        emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        BURN OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _burn(tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        address from = address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked));
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck) {
            // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
            if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
                if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) _revert(TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved.selector);
        }
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance -= 1`.
            // - `numberBurned += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly decrement the balance, and increment the number burned.
            // This is equivalent to `packed -= 1; packed += 1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED;`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) - 1;
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the last owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of burning.
            // - `burned` to `true`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                from,
                (_BITMASK_BURNED | _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED) | _nextExtraData(from, address(0), prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Overflow not possible, as _burnCounter cannot be exceed _currentIndex times.
        unchecked {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter++;
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     EXTRA DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Directly sets the extra data for the ownership data `index`.
     */
    function _setExtraDataAt(uint256 index, uint24 extraData) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index];
        if (packed == 0) _revert(OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData.selector);
        uint256 extraDataCasted;
        // Cast `extraData` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            extraDataCasted := extraData
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT) | (extraDataCasted << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = packed;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Called during each token transfer to set the 24bit `extraData` field.
     * Intended to be overridden by the cosumer contract.
     *
     * `previousExtraData` - the value of `extraData` before transfer.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _extraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint24 previousExtraData
    ) internal view virtual returns (uint24) {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next extra data for the packed ownership data.
     * The returned result is shifted into position.
     */
    function _nextExtraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint24 extraData = uint24(prevOwnershipPacked >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        return uint256(_extraData(from, to, extraData)) << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       OTHER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the message sender (defaults to `msg.sender`).
     *
     * If you are writing GSN compatible contracts, you need to override this function.
     */
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a uint256 to its ASCII string decimal representation.
     */
    function _toString(uint256 value) internal pure virtual returns (string memory str) {
        assembly {
            // The maximum value of a uint256 contains 78 digits (1 byte per digit), but
            // we allocate 0xa0 bytes to keep the free memory pointer 32-byte word aligned.
            // We will need 1 word for the trailing zeros padding, 1 word for the length,
            // and 3 words for a maximum of 78 digits. Total: 5 * 0x20 = 0xa0.
            let m := add(mload(0x40), 0xa0)
            // Update the free memory pointer to allocate.
            mstore(0x40, m)
            // Assign the `str` to the end.
            str := sub(m, 0x20)
            // Zeroize the slot after the string.
            mstore(str, 0)
            // Cache the end of the memory to calculate the length later.
            let end := str
            // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
            // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let temp := value } 1 {} {
                str := sub(str, 1)
                // Write the character to the pointer.
                // The ASCII index of the '0' character is 48.
                mstore8(str, add(48, mod(temp, 10)))
                // Keep dividing `temp` until zero.
                temp := div(temp, 10)
                // prettier-ignore
                if iszero(temp) { break }
            }
            let length := sub(end, str)
            // Move the pointer 32 bytes leftwards to make room for the length.
            str := sub(str, 0x20)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(str, length)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev For more efficient reverts.
     */
    function _revert(bytes4 errorSelector) internal pure {
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, errorSelector)
            revert(0x00, 0x04)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable diamond facet contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 */
import { ERC721A__InitializableStorage } from "./ERC721A__InitializableStorage.sol";
abstract contract ERC721A__Initializable {
    using ERC721A__InitializableStorage for ERC721A__InitializableStorage.Layout;
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initializer function from being invoked twice.
     */
    modifier initializerERC721A() {
        // If the contract is initializing we ignore whether _initialized is set in order to support multiple
        // inheritance patterns, but we only do this in the context of a constructor, because in other contexts the
        // contract may have been reentered.
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing
                ? _isConstructor()
                : !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized,
            "ERC721A__Initializable: contract is already initialized"
        );
        bool isTopLevelCall = !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = true;
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} modifier, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializingERC721A() {
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing,
            "ERC721A__Initializable: contract is not initializing"
        );
        _;
    }
    /// @dev Returns true if and only if the function is running in the constructor
    function _isConstructor() private view returns (bool) {
        // extcodesize checks the size of the code stored in an address, and
        // address returns the current address. Since the code is still not
        // deployed when running a constructor, any checks on its code size will
        // yield zero, making it an effective way to detect if a contract is
        // under construction or not.
        address self = address(this);
        uint256 cs;
        assembly {
            cs := extcodesize(self)
        }
        return cs == 0;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base storage for the  initialization function for upgradeable diamond facet contracts
 **/
library ERC721A__InitializableStorage {
    struct Layout {
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
         */
        bool _initialized;
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
         */
        bool _initializing;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256("ERC721A.contracts.storage.initializable.facet");
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import "./IERC721AUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721AQueryable.
 */
interface IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * Invalid query range (`start` >= `stop`).
     */
    error InvalidQueryRange();
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (TokenOwnership memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721A.
 */
interface IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
     */
    error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
    /**
     * Cannot mint to the zero address.
     */
    error MintToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
     */
    error MintZeroQuantity();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token must be owned by `from`.
     */
    error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
    /**
     * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the
     * ERC721Receiver interface.
     */
    error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
    /**
     * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
     */
    error TransferToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The `quantity` minted with ERC2309 exceeds the safety limit.
     */
    error MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
    /**
     * The `extraData` cannot be set on an unintialized ownership slot.
     */
    error OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
    // =============================================================
    //                            STRUCTS
    // =============================================================
    struct TokenOwnership {
        // The address of the owner.
        address addr;
        // Stores the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
        uint64 startTimestamp;
        // Whether the token has been burned.
        bool burned;
        // Arbitrary data similar to `startTimestamp` that can be set via {_extraData}.
        uint24 extraData;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                         TOKEN COUNTERS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC721
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables
     * (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`,
     * checking first that contract recipients are aware of the ERC721 protocol
     * to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move
     * this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom}
     * whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);
    // =============================================================
    //                           IERC2309
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when tokens in `fromTokenId` to `toTokenId`
     * (inclusive) is transferred from `from` to `to`, as defined in the
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309) standard.
     *
     * See {_mintERC2309} for more details.
     */
    event ConsecutiveTransfer(uint256 indexed fromTokenId, uint256 toTokenId, address indexed from, address indexed to);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IContractMetadata.sol";
/**
 *  @title   Contract Metadata
 *  @notice  Thirdweb's `ContractMetadata` is a contract extension for any base contracts. It lets you set a metadata URI
 *           for you contract.
 *           Additionally, `ContractMetadata` is necessary for NFT contracts that want royalties to get distributed on OpenSea.
 */
abstract contract ContractMetadata is IContractMetadata {
    /// @notice Returns the contract metadata URI.
    string public override contractURI;
    /**
     *  @notice         Lets a contract admin set the URI for contract-level metadata.
     *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to setup contractURI, e.g. contract admin.
     *                  See {_canSetContractURI}.
     *                  Emits {ContractURIUpdated Event}.
     *
     *  @param _uri     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     */
    function setContractURI(string memory _uri) external override {
        if (!_canSetContractURI()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _setupContractURI(_uri);
    }
    /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the URI for contract-level metadata.
    function _setupContractURI(string memory _uri) internal {
        string memory prevURI = contractURI;
        contractURI = _uri;
        emit ContractURIUpdated(prevURI, _uri);
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether contract metadata can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetContractURI() internal view virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import { OperatorFiltererUpgradeable } from "./OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.sol";
abstract contract DefaultOperatorFiltererUpgradeable is OperatorFiltererUpgradeable {
    address constant DEFAULT_SUBSCRIPTION = address(0x3cc6CddA760b79bAfa08dF41ECFA224f810dCeB6);
    function __DefaultOperatorFilterer_init() internal {
        OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.__OperatorFilterer_init(DEFAULT_SUBSCRIPTION, true);
    }
    function subscribeToRegistry(address _subscription) external {
        require(_canSetOperatorRestriction(), "Not authorized to subscribe to registry.");
        _register(_subscription, true);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IDrop.sol";
import "../lib/MerkleProof.sol";
abstract contract Drop is IDrop {
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            State variables
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev The active conditions for claiming tokens.
    ClaimConditionList public claimCondition;
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            Drop logic
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev Lets an account claim tokens.
    function claim(
        address _receiver,
        uint256 _quantity,
        address _currency,
        uint256 _pricePerToken,
        AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        _beforeClaim(_receiver, _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken, _allowlistProof, _data);
        uint256 activeConditionId = getActiveClaimConditionId();
        verifyClaim(activeConditionId, _dropMsgSender(), _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken, _allowlistProof);
        // Update contract state.
        claimCondition.conditions[activeConditionId].supplyClaimed += _quantity;
        claimCondition.supplyClaimedByWallet[activeConditionId][_dropMsgSender()] += _quantity;
        // If there's a price, collect price.
        _collectPriceOnClaim(address(0), _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken);
        // Mint the relevant tokens to claimer.
        uint256 startTokenId = _transferTokensOnClaim(_receiver, _quantity);
        emit TokensClaimed(activeConditionId, _dropMsgSender(), _receiver, startTokenId, _quantity);
        _afterClaim(_receiver, _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken, _allowlistProof, _data);
    }
    /// @dev Lets a contract admin set claim conditions.
    function setClaimConditions(ClaimCondition[] calldata _conditions, bool _resetClaimEligibility)
        external
        virtual
        override
    {
        if (!_canSetClaimConditions()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        uint256 existingStartIndex = claimCondition.currentStartId;
        uint256 existingPhaseCount = claimCondition.count;
        /**
         *  The mapping `supplyClaimedByWallet` uses a claim condition's UID as a key.
         *
         *  If `_resetClaimEligibility == true`, we assign completely new UIDs to the claim
         *  conditions in `_conditions`, effectively resetting the restrictions on claims expressed
         *  by `supplyClaimedByWallet`.
         */
        uint256 newStartIndex = existingStartIndex;
        if (_resetClaimEligibility) {
            newStartIndex = existingStartIndex + existingPhaseCount;
        }
        claimCondition.count = _conditions.length;
        claimCondition.currentStartId = newStartIndex;
        uint256 lastConditionStartTimestamp;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < _conditions.length; i++) {
            require(i == 0 || lastConditionStartTimestamp < _conditions[i].startTimestamp, "ST");
            uint256 supplyClaimedAlready = claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i].supplyClaimed;
            if (supplyClaimedAlready > _conditions[i].maxClaimableSupply) {
                revert("max supply claimed");
            }
            claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i] = _conditions[i];
            claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i].supplyClaimed = supplyClaimedAlready;
            lastConditionStartTimestamp = _conditions[i].startTimestamp;
        }
        /**
         *  Gas refunds (as much as possible)
         *
         *  If `_resetClaimEligibility == true`, we assign completely new UIDs to the claim
         *  conditions in `_conditions`. So, we delete claim conditions with UID < `newStartIndex`.
         *
         *  If `_resetClaimEligibility == false`, and there are more existing claim conditions
         *  than in `_conditions`, we delete the existing claim conditions that don't get replaced
         *  by the conditions in `_conditions`.
         */
        if (_resetClaimEligibility) {
            for (uint256 i = existingStartIndex; i < newStartIndex; i++) {
                delete claimCondition.conditions[i];
            }
        } else {
            if (existingPhaseCount > _conditions.length) {
                for (uint256 i = _conditions.length; i < existingPhaseCount; i++) {
                    delete claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i];
                }
            }
        }
        emit ClaimConditionsUpdated(_conditions, _resetClaimEligibility);
    }
    /// @dev Checks a request to claim NFTs against the active claim condition's criteria.
    function verifyClaim(
        uint256 _conditionId,
        address _claimer,
        uint256 _quantity,
        address _currency,
        uint256 _pricePerToken,
        AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof
    ) public view returns (bool isOverride) {
        ClaimCondition memory currentClaimPhase = claimCondition.conditions[_conditionId];
        uint256 claimLimit = currentClaimPhase.quantityLimitPerWallet;
        uint256 claimPrice = currentClaimPhase.pricePerToken;
        address claimCurrency = currentClaimPhase.currency;
        if (currentClaimPhase.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
            (isOverride, ) = MerkleProof.verify(
                _allowlistProof.proof,
                currentClaimPhase.merkleRoot,
                keccak256(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        _claimer,
                        _allowlistProof.quantityLimitPerWallet,
                        _allowlistProof.pricePerToken,
                        _allowlistProof.currency
                    )
                )
            );
        }
        if (isOverride) {
            claimLimit = _allowlistProof.quantityLimitPerWallet != 0
                ? _allowlistProof.quantityLimitPerWallet
                : claimLimit;
            claimPrice = _allowlistProof.pricePerToken != type(uint256).max
                ? _allowlistProof.pricePerToken
                : claimPrice;
            claimCurrency = _allowlistProof.pricePerToken != type(uint256).max && _allowlistProof.currency != address(0)
                ? _allowlistProof.currency
                : claimCurrency;
        }
        uint256 supplyClaimedByWallet = claimCondition.supplyClaimedByWallet[_conditionId][_claimer];
        if (_currency != claimCurrency || _pricePerToken != claimPrice) {
            revert("!PriceOrCurrency");
        }
        if (_quantity == 0 || (_quantity + supplyClaimedByWallet > claimLimit)) {
            revert("!Qty");
        }
        if (currentClaimPhase.supplyClaimed + _quantity > currentClaimPhase.maxClaimableSupply) {
            revert("!MaxSupply");
        }
        if (currentClaimPhase.startTimestamp > block.timestamp) {
            revert("cant claim yet");
        }
    }
    /// @dev At any given moment, returns the uid for the active claim condition.
    function getActiveClaimConditionId() public view returns (uint256) {
        for (uint256 i = claimCondition.currentStartId + claimCondition.count; i > claimCondition.currentStartId; i--) {
            if (block.timestamp >= claimCondition.conditions[i - 1].startTimestamp) {
                return i - 1;
            }
        }
        revert("!CONDITION.");
    }
    /// @dev Returns the claim condition at the given uid.
    function getClaimConditionById(uint256 _conditionId) external view returns (ClaimCondition memory condition) {
        condition = claimCondition.conditions[_conditionId];
    }
    /// @dev Returns the supply claimed by claimer for a given conditionId.
    function getSupplyClaimedByWallet(uint256 _conditionId, address _claimer)
        public
        view
        returns (uint256 supplyClaimedByWallet)
    {
        supplyClaimedByWallet = claimCondition.supplyClaimedByWallet[_conditionId][_claimer];
    }
    /*////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
        Optional hooks that can be implemented in the derived contract
    ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev Exposes the ability to override the msg sender.
    function _dropMsgSender() internal virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    /// @dev Runs before every `claim` function call.
    function _beforeClaim(
        address _receiver,
        uint256 _quantity,
        address _currency,
        uint256 _pricePerToken,
        AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {}
    /// @dev Runs after every `claim` function call.
    function _afterClaim(
        address _receiver,
        uint256 _quantity,
        address _currency,
        uint256 _pricePerToken,
        AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {}
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
        Virtual functions: to be implemented in derived contract
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev Collects and distributes the primary sale value of NFTs being claimed.
    function _collectPriceOnClaim(
        address _primarySaleRecipient,
        uint256 _quantityToClaim,
        address _currency,
        uint256 _pricePerToken
    ) internal virtual;
    /// @dev Transfers the NFTs being claimed.
    function _transferTokensOnClaim(address _to, uint256 _quantityBeingClaimed)
        internal
        virtual
        returns (uint256 startTokenId);
    /// @dev Determine what wallet can update claim conditions
    function _canSetClaimConditions() internal view virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "../lib/TWAddress.sol";
import "./interface/IMulticall.sol";
/**
 * @dev Provides a function to batch together multiple calls in a single external call.
 *
 * _Available since v4.1._
 */
contract Multicall is IMulticall {
    /**
     *  @notice Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
     *  @dev Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
     *
     *  @param data The bytes data that makes up the batch of function calls to execute.
     *  @return results The bytes data that makes up the result of the batch of function calls executed.
     */
    function multicall(bytes[] calldata data) external virtual override returns (bytes[] memory results) {
        results = new bytes[](data.length);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < data.length; i++) {
            results[i] = TWAddress.functionDelegateCall(address(this), data[i]);
        }
        return results;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IOperatorFilterToggle.sol";
abstract contract OperatorFilterToggle is IOperatorFilterToggle {
    bool public operatorRestriction;
    function setOperatorRestriction(bool _restriction) external {
        require(_canSetOperatorRestriction(), "Not authorized to set operator restriction.");
        _setOperatorRestriction(_restriction);
    }
    function _setOperatorRestriction(bool _restriction) internal {
        operatorRestriction = _restriction;
        emit OperatorRestriction(_restriction);
    }
    function _canSetOperatorRestriction() internal virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IOperatorFilterRegistry.sol";
import "./OperatorFilterToggle.sol";
abstract contract OperatorFiltererUpgradeable is OperatorFilterToggle {
    error OperatorNotAllowed(address operator);
    IOperatorFilterRegistry constant OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY =
        IOperatorFilterRegistry(0x000000000000AAeB6D7670E522A718067333cd4E);
    function __OperatorFilterer_init(address subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy, bool subscribe) internal {
        // If an inheriting token contract is deployed to a network without the registry deployed, the modifier
        // will not revert, but the contract will need to be registered with the registry once it is deployed in
        // order for the modifier to filter addresses.
        _register(subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy, subscribe);
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperator(address from) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (operatorRestriction) {
            if (address(OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY).code.length > 0) {
                // Allow spending tokens from addresses with balance
                // Note that this still allows listings and marketplaces with escrow to transfer tokens if transferred
                // from an EOA.
                if (from == msg.sender) {
                    _;
                    return;
                }
                if (!OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), msg.sender)) {
                    revert OperatorNotAllowed(msg.sender);
                }
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(address operator) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (operatorRestriction) {
            if (address(OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY).code.length > 0) {
                if (!OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), operator)) {
                    revert OperatorNotAllowed(operator);
                }
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    function _register(address subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy, bool subscribe) internal {
        // Is the registry deployed?
        if (address(OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY).code.length > 0) {
            // Is the subscription contract deployed?
            if (address(subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy).code.length > 0) {
                // Do we want to subscribe?
                if (subscribe) {
                    OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY.registerAndSubscribe(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                } else {
                    OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY.registerAndCopyEntries(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                }
            } else {
                OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY.register(address(this));
            }
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IOwnable.sol";
/**
 *  @title   Ownable
 *  @notice  Thirdweb's `Ownable` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
 *           who the 'owner' of the inheriting smart contract is, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses
 *           information about who the contract's owner is.
 */
abstract contract Ownable is IOwnable {
    /// @dev Owner of the contract (purpose: OpenSea compatibility)
    address private _owner;
    /// @dev Reverts if caller is not the owner.
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        if (msg.sender != _owner) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice Returns the owner of the contract.
     */
    function owner() public view override returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice Lets an authorized wallet set a new owner for the contract.
     *  @param _newOwner The address to set as the new owner of the contract.
     */
    function setOwner(address _newOwner) external override {
        if (!_canSetOwner()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _setupOwner(_newOwner);
    }
    /// @dev Lets a contract admin set a new owner for the contract. The new owner must be a contract admin.
    function _setupOwner(address _newOwner) internal {
        address _prevOwner = _owner;
        _owner = _newOwner;
        emit OwnerUpdated(_prevOwner, _newOwner);
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether owner can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetOwner() internal view virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IPermissions.sol";
import "../lib/TWStrings.sol";
/**
 *  @title   Permissions
 *  @dev     This contracts provides extending-contracts with role-based access control mechanisms
 */
contract Permissions is IPermissions {
    /// @dev Map from keccak256 hash of a role => a map from address => whether address has role.
    mapping(bytes32 => mapping(address => bool)) private _hasRole;
    /// @dev Map from keccak256 hash of a role to role admin. See {getRoleAdmin}.
    mapping(bytes32 => bytes32) private _getRoleAdmin;
    /// @dev Default admin role for all roles. Only accounts with this role can grant/revoke other roles.
    bytes32 public constant DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE = 0x00;
    /// @dev Modifier that checks if an account has the specified role; reverts otherwise.
    modifier onlyRole(bytes32 role) {
        _checkRole(role, msg.sender);
        _;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Checks whether an account has a particular role.
     *  @dev            Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *  @param account  Address of the account for which the role is being checked.
     */
    function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) public view override returns (bool) {
        return _hasRole[role][account];
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Checks whether an account has a particular role;
     *                  role restrictions can be swtiched on and off.
     *
     *  @dev            Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     *                  Role restrictions can be swtiched on and off:
     *                      - If address(0) has ROLE, then the ROLE restrictions
     *                        don't apply.
     *                      - If address(0) does not have ROLE, then the ROLE
     *                        restrictions will apply.
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *  @param account  Address of the account for which the role is being checked.
     */
    function hasRoleWithSwitch(bytes32 role, address account) public view returns (bool) {
        if (!_hasRole[role][address(0)]) {
            return _hasRole[role][account];
        }
        return true;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Returns the admin role that controls the specified role.
     *  @dev            See {grantRole} and {revokeRole}.
     *                  To change a role's admin, use {_setRoleAdmin}.
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     */
    function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) external view override returns (bytes32) {
        return _getRoleAdmin[role];
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Grants a role to an account, if not previously granted.
     *  @dev            Caller must have admin role for the `role`.
     *                  Emits {RoleGranted Event}.
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *  @param account  Address of the account to which the role is being granted.
     */
    function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
        _checkRole(_getRoleAdmin[role], msg.sender);
        if (_hasRole[role][account]) {
            revert("Can only grant to non holders");
        }
        _setupRole(role, account);
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Revokes role from an account.
     *  @dev            Caller must have admin role for the `role`.
     *                  Emits {RoleRevoked Event}.
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *  @param account  Address of the account from which the role is being revoked.
     */
    function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
        _checkRole(_getRoleAdmin[role], msg.sender);
        _revokeRole(role, account);
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Revokes role from the account.
     *  @dev            Caller must have the `role`, with caller being the same as `account`.
     *                  Emits {RoleRevoked Event}.
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *  @param account  Address of the account from which the role is being revoked.
     */
    function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
        if (msg.sender != account) {
            revert("Can only renounce for self");
        }
        _revokeRole(role, account);
    }
    /// @dev Sets `adminRole` as `role`'s admin role.
    function _setRoleAdmin(bytes32 role, bytes32 adminRole) internal virtual {
        bytes32 previousAdminRole = _getRoleAdmin[role];
        _getRoleAdmin[role] = adminRole;
        emit RoleAdminChanged(role, previousAdminRole, adminRole);
    }
    /// @dev Sets up `role` for `account`
    function _setupRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        _hasRole[role][account] = true;
        emit RoleGranted(role, account, msg.sender);
    }
    /// @dev Revokes `role` from `account`
    function _revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        _checkRole(role, account);
        delete _hasRole[role][account];
        emit RoleRevoked(role, account, msg.sender);
    }
    /// @dev Checks `role` for `account`. Reverts with a message including the required role.
    function _checkRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal view virtual {
        if (!_hasRole[role][account]) {
            revert(
                string(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        "Permissions: account ",
                        TWStrings.toHexString(uint160(account), 20),
                        " is missing role ",
                        TWStrings.toHexString(uint256(role), 32)
                    )
                )
            );
        }
    }
    /// @dev Checks `role` for `account`. Reverts with a message including the required role.
    function _checkRoleWithSwitch(bytes32 role, address account) internal view virtual {
        if (!hasRoleWithSwitch(role, account)) {
            revert(
                string(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        "Permissions: account ",
                        TWStrings.toHexString(uint160(account), 20),
                        " is missing role ",
                        TWStrings.toHexString(uint256(role), 32)
                    )
                )
            );
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IPermissionsEnumerable.sol";
import "./Permissions.sol";
/**
 *  @title   PermissionsEnumerable
 *  @dev     This contracts provides extending-contracts with role-based access control mechanisms.
 *           Also provides interfaces to view all members with a given role, and total count of members.
 */
contract PermissionsEnumerable is IPermissionsEnumerable, Permissions {
    /**
     *  @notice A data structure to store data of members for a given role.
     *
     *  @param index    Current index in the list of accounts that have a role.
     *  @param members  map from index => address of account that has a role
     *  @param indexOf  map from address => index which the account has.
     */
    struct RoleMembers {
        uint256 index;
        mapping(uint256 => address) members;
        mapping(address => uint256) indexOf;
    }
    /// @dev map from keccak256 hash of a role to its members' data. See {RoleMembers}.
    mapping(bytes32 => RoleMembers) private roleMembers;
    /**
     *  @notice         Returns the role-member from a list of members for a role,
     *                  at a given index.
     *  @dev            Returns `member` who has `role`, at `index` of role-members list.
     *                  See struct {RoleMembers}, and mapping {roleMembers}
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *  @param index    Index in list of current members for the role.
     *
     *  @return member  Address of account that has `role`
     */
    function getRoleMember(bytes32 role, uint256 index) external view override returns (address member) {
        uint256 currentIndex = roleMembers[role].index;
        uint256 check;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < currentIndex; i += 1) {
            if (roleMembers[role].members[i] != address(0)) {
                if (check == index) {
                    member = roleMembers[role].members[i];
                    return member;
                }
                check += 1;
            } else if (hasRole(role, address(0)) && i == roleMembers[role].indexOf[address(0)]) {
                check += 1;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Returns total number of accounts that have a role.
     *  @dev            Returns `count` of accounts that have `role`.
     *                  See struct {RoleMembers}, and mapping {roleMembers}
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *
     *  @return count   Total number of accounts that have `role`
     */
    function getRoleMemberCount(bytes32 role) external view override returns (uint256 count) {
        uint256 currentIndex = roleMembers[role].index;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < currentIndex; i += 1) {
            if (roleMembers[role].members[i] != address(0)) {
                count += 1;
            }
        }
        if (hasRole(role, address(0))) {
            count += 1;
        }
    }
    /// @dev Revokes `role` from `account`, and removes `account` from {roleMembers}
    ///      See {_removeMember}
    function _revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal override {
        super._revokeRole(role, account);
        _removeMember(role, account);
    }
    /// @dev Grants `role` to `account`, and adds `account` to {roleMembers}
    ///      See {_addMember}
    function _setupRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal override {
        super._setupRole(role, account);
        _addMember(role, account);
    }
    /// @dev adds `account` to {roleMembers}, for `role`
    function _addMember(bytes32 role, address account) internal {
        uint256 idx = roleMembers[role].index;
        roleMembers[role].index += 1;
        roleMembers[role].members[idx] = account;
        roleMembers[role].indexOf[account] = idx;
    }
    /// @dev removes `account` from {roleMembers}, for `role`
    function _removeMember(bytes32 role, address account) internal {
        uint256 idx = roleMembers[role].indexOf[account];
        delete roleMembers[role].members[idx];
        delete roleMembers[role].indexOf[account];
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IPrimarySale.sol";
/**
 *  @title   Primary Sale
 *  @notice  Thirdweb's `PrimarySale` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
 *           the recipient of primary sales, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses information about
 *           primary sales, if desired.
 */
abstract contract PrimarySale is IPrimarySale {
    /// @dev The address that receives all primary sales value.
    address private recipient;
    /// @dev Returns primary sale recipient address.
    function primarySaleRecipient() public view override returns (address) {
        return recipient;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Updates primary sale recipient.
     *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to set primary sales info.
     *                  See {_canSetPrimarySaleRecipient}.
     *                  Emits {PrimarySaleRecipientUpdated Event}; See {_setupPrimarySaleRecipient}.
     *
     *  @param _saleRecipient   Address to be set as new recipient of primary sales.
     */
    function setPrimarySaleRecipient(address _saleRecipient) external override {
        if (!_canSetPrimarySaleRecipient()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _setupPrimarySaleRecipient(_saleRecipient);
    }
    /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the recipient for all primary sales.
    function _setupPrimarySaleRecipient(address _saleRecipient) internal {
        recipient = _saleRecipient;
        emit PrimarySaleRecipientUpdated(_saleRecipient);
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether primary sale recipient can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetPrimarySaleRecipient() internal view virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IRoyalty.sol";
/**
 *  @title   Royalty
 *  @notice  Thirdweb's `Royalty` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
 *           the recipient of royalty fee and the royalty fee basis points, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic
 *           that uses information about royalty fees, if desired.
 *
 *  @dev     The `Royalty` contract is ERC2981 compliant.
 */
abstract contract Royalty is IRoyalty {
    /// @dev The (default) address that receives all royalty value.
    address private royaltyRecipient;
    /// @dev The (default) % of a sale to take as royalty (in basis points).
    uint16 private royaltyBps;
    /// @dev Token ID => royalty recipient and bps for token
    mapping(uint256 => RoyaltyInfo) private royaltyInfoForToken;
    /**
     *  @notice   View royalty info for a given token and sale price.
     *  @dev      Returns royalty amount and recipient for `tokenId` and `salePrice`.
     *  @param tokenId          The tokenID of the NFT for which to query royalty info.
     *  @param salePrice        Sale price of the token.
     *
     *  @return receiver        Address of royalty recipient account.
     *  @return royaltyAmount   Royalty amount calculated at current royaltyBps value.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount)
    {
        (address recipient, uint256 bps) = getRoyaltyInfoForToken(tokenId);
        receiver = recipient;
        royaltyAmount = (salePrice * bps) / 10_000;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice          View royalty info for a given token.
     *  @dev             Returns royalty recipient and bps for `_tokenId`.
     *  @param _tokenId  The tokenID of the NFT for which to query royalty info.
     */
    function getRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 _tokenId) public view override returns (address, uint16) {
        RoyaltyInfo memory royaltyForToken = royaltyInfoForToken[_tokenId];
        return
            royaltyForToken.recipient == address(0)
                ? (royaltyRecipient, uint16(royaltyBps))
                : (royaltyForToken.recipient, uint16(royaltyForToken.bps));
    }
    /**
     *  @notice Returns the defualt royalty recipient and BPS for this contract's NFTs.
     */
    function getDefaultRoyaltyInfo() external view override returns (address, uint16) {
        return (royaltyRecipient, uint16(royaltyBps));
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Updates default royalty recipient and bps.
     *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to set royalty info.
     *                  See {_canSetRoyaltyInfo}.
     *                  Emits {DefaultRoyalty Event}; See {_setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo}.
     *
     *  @param _royaltyRecipient   Address to be set as default royalty recipient.
     *  @param _royaltyBps         Updated royalty bps.
     */
    function setDefaultRoyaltyInfo(address _royaltyRecipient, uint256 _royaltyBps) external override {
        if (!_canSetRoyaltyInfo()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo(_royaltyRecipient, _royaltyBps);
    }
    /// @dev Lets a contract admin update the default royalty recipient and bps.
    function _setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo(address _royaltyRecipient, uint256 _royaltyBps) internal {
        if (_royaltyBps > 10_000) {
            revert("Exceeds max bps");
        }
        royaltyRecipient = _royaltyRecipient;
        royaltyBps = uint16(_royaltyBps);
        emit DefaultRoyalty(_royaltyRecipient, _royaltyBps);
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Updates default royalty recipient and bps for a particular token.
     *  @dev            Sets royalty info for `_tokenId`. Caller should be authorized to set royalty info.
     *                  See {_canSetRoyaltyInfo}.
     *                  Emits {RoyaltyForToken Event}; See {_setupRoyaltyInfoForToken}.
     *
     *  @param _recipient   Address to be set as royalty recipient for given token Id.
     *  @param _bps         Updated royalty bps for the token Id.
     */
    function setRoyaltyInfoForToken(
        uint256 _tokenId,
        address _recipient,
        uint256 _bps
    ) external override {
        if (!_canSetRoyaltyInfo()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _setupRoyaltyInfoForToken(_tokenId, _recipient, _bps);
    }
    /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the royalty recipient and bps for a particular token Id.
    function _setupRoyaltyInfoForToken(
        uint256 _tokenId,
        address _recipient,
        uint256 _bps
    ) internal {
        if (_bps > 10_000) {
            revert("Exceeds max bps");
        }
        royaltyInfoForToken[_tokenId] = RoyaltyInfo({ recipient: _recipient, bps: _bps });
        emit RoyaltyForToken(_tokenId, _recipient, _bps);
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether royalty info can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetRoyaltyInfo() internal view virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;
/// @author thirdweb
import "../lib/NFTMetadataRendererLib.sol";
import "./interface/ISharedMetadata.sol";
import "../eip/interface/IERC4906.sol";
abstract contract SharedMetadata is ISharedMetadata, IERC4906 {
    /// @notice Token metadata information
    SharedMetadataInfo public sharedMetadata;
    /// @notice Set shared metadata for NFTs
    function setSharedMetadata(SharedMetadataInfo calldata _metadata) external virtual {
        if (!_canSetSharedMetadata()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _setSharedMetadata(_metadata);
    }
    /**
     *  @dev Sets shared metadata for NFTs.
     *  @param _metadata common metadata for all tokens
     */
    function _setSharedMetadata(SharedMetadataInfo calldata _metadata) internal {
        sharedMetadata = SharedMetadataInfo({
            name: _metadata.name,
            description: _metadata.description,
            imageURI: _metadata.imageURI,
            animationURI: _metadata.animationURI
        });
        emit BatchMetadataUpdate(0, type(uint256).max);
        emit SharedMetadataUpdated({
            name: _metadata.name,
            description: _metadata.description,
            imageURI: _metadata.imageURI,
            animationURI: _metadata.animationURI
        });
    }
    /**
     *  @dev Token URI information getter
     *  @param tokenId Token ID to get URI for
     */
    function _getURIFromSharedMetadata(uint256 tokenId) internal view returns (string memory) {
        SharedMetadataInfo memory info = sharedMetadata;
        return
            NFTMetadataRenderer.createMetadataEdition({
                name: info.name,
                description: info.description,
                imageURI: info.imageURI,
                animationURI: info.animationURI,
                tokenOfEdition: tokenId
            });
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether shared metadata can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetSharedMetadata() internal view virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 *  The interface `IClaimCondition` is written for thirdweb's 'Drop' contracts, which are distribution mechanisms for tokens.
 *
 *  A claim condition defines criteria under which accounts can mint tokens. Claim conditions can be overwritten
 *  or added to by the contract admin. At any moment, there is only one active claim condition.
 */
interface IClaimCondition {
    /**
     *  @notice The criteria that make up a claim condition.
     *
     *  @param startTimestamp                 The unix timestamp after which the claim condition applies.
     *                                        The same claim condition applies until the `startTimestamp`
     *                                        of the next claim condition.
     *
     *  @param maxClaimableSupply             The maximum total number of tokens that can be claimed under
     *                                        the claim condition.
     *
     *  @param supplyClaimed                  At any given point, the number of tokens that have been claimed
     *                                        under the claim condition.
     *
     *  @param quantityLimitPerWallet         The maximum number of tokens that can be claimed by a wallet.
     *
     *  @param merkleRoot                     The allowlist of addresses that can claim tokens under the claim
     *                                        condition.
     *
     *  @param pricePerToken                  The price required to pay per token claimed.
     *
     *  @param currency                       The currency in which the `pricePerToken` must be paid.
     *
     *  @param metadata                       Claim condition metadata.
     */
    struct ClaimCondition {
        uint256 startTimestamp;
        uint256 maxClaimableSupply;
        uint256 supplyClaimed;
        uint256 quantityLimitPerWallet;
        bytes32 merkleRoot;
        uint256 pricePerToken;
        address currency;
        string metadata;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./IClaimCondition.sol";
/**
 *  The interface `IClaimConditionMultiPhase` is written for thirdweb's 'Drop' contracts, which are distribution mechanisms for tokens.
 *
 *  An authorized wallet can set a series of claim conditions, ordered by their respective `startTimestamp`.
 *  A claim condition defines criteria under which accounts can mint tokens. Claim conditions can be overwritten
 *  or added to by the contract admin. At any moment, there is only one active claim condition.
 */
interface IClaimConditionMultiPhase is IClaimCondition {
    /**
     *  @notice The set of all claim conditions, at any given moment.
     *  Claim Phase ID = [currentStartId, currentStartId + length - 1];
     *
     *  @param currentStartId           The uid for the first claim condition amongst the current set of
     *                                  claim conditions. The uid for each next claim condition is one
     *                                  more than the previous claim condition's uid.
     *
     *  @param count                    The total number of phases / claim conditions in the list
     *                                  of claim conditions.
     *
     *  @param conditions                   The claim conditions at a given uid. Claim conditions
     *                                  are ordered in an ascending order by their `startTimestamp`.
     *
     *  @param supplyClaimedByWallet    Map from a claim condition uid and account to supply claimed by account.
     */
    struct ClaimConditionList {
        uint256 currentStartId;
        uint256 count;
        mapping(uint256 => ClaimCondition) conditions;
        mapping(uint256 => mapping(address => uint256)) supplyClaimedByWallet;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 *  Thirdweb's `ContractMetadata` is a contract extension for any base contracts. It lets you set a metadata URI
 *  for you contract.
 *
 *  Additionally, `ContractMetadata` is necessary for NFT contracts that want royalties to get distributed on OpenSea.
 */
interface IContractMetadata {
    /// @dev Returns the metadata URI of the contract.
    function contractURI() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     *  @dev Sets contract URI for the storefront-level metadata of the contract.
     *       Only module admin can call this function.
     */
    function setContractURI(string calldata _uri) external;
    /// @dev Emitted when the contract URI is updated.
    event ContractURIUpdated(string prevURI, string newURI);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./IClaimConditionMultiPhase.sol";
/**
 *  The interface `IDrop` is written for thirdweb's 'Drop' contracts, which are distribution mechanisms for tokens.
 *
 *  An authorized wallet can set a series of claim conditions, ordered by their respective `startTimestamp`.
 *  A claim condition defines criteria under which accounts can mint tokens. Claim conditions can be overwritten
 *  or added to by the contract admin. At any moment, there is only one active claim condition.
 */
interface IDrop is IClaimConditionMultiPhase {
    /**
     *  @param proof Prood of concerned wallet's inclusion in an allowlist.
     *  @param quantityLimitPerWallet The total quantity of tokens the allowlisted wallet is eligible to claim over time.
     *  @param pricePerToken The price per token the allowlisted wallet must pay to claim tokens.
     *  @param currency The currency in which the allowlisted wallet must pay the price for claiming tokens.
     */
    struct AllowlistProof {
        bytes32[] proof;
        uint256 quantityLimitPerWallet;
        uint256 pricePerToken;
        address currency;
    }
    /// @notice Emitted when tokens are claimed via `claim`.
    event TokensClaimed(
        uint256 indexed claimConditionIndex,
        address indexed claimer,
        address indexed receiver,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantityClaimed
    );
    /// @notice Emitted when the contract's claim conditions are updated.
    event ClaimConditionsUpdated(ClaimCondition[] claimConditions, bool resetEligibility);
    /**
     *  @notice Lets an account claim a given quantity of NFTs.
     *
     *  @param receiver                       The receiver of the NFTs to claim.
     *  @param quantity                       The quantity of NFTs to claim.
     *  @param currency                       The currency in which to pay for the claim.
     *  @param pricePerToken                  The price per token to pay for the claim.
     *  @param allowlistProof                 The proof of the claimer's inclusion in the merkle root allowlist
     *                                        of the claim conditions that apply.
     *  @param data                           Arbitrary bytes data that can be leveraged in the implementation of this interface.
     */
    function claim(
        address receiver,
        uint256 quantity,
        address currency,
        uint256 pricePerToken,
        AllowlistProof calldata allowlistProof,
        bytes memory data
    ) external payable;
    /**
     *  @notice Lets a contract admin (account with `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE`) set claim conditions.
     *
     *  @param phases                   Claim conditions in ascending order by `startTimestamp`.
     *
     *  @param resetClaimEligibility    Whether to honor the restrictions applied to wallets who have claimed tokens in the current conditions,
     *                                  in the new claim conditions being set.
     *
     */
    function setClaimConditions(ClaimCondition[] calldata phases, bool resetClaimEligibility) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 * @dev Provides a function to batch together multiple calls in a single external call.
 *
 * _Available since v4.1._
 */
interface IMulticall {
    /**
     * @dev Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
     */
    function multicall(bytes[] calldata data) external returns (bytes[] memory results);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
interface IOperatorFilterRegistry {
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    function register(address registrant) external;
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external;
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function unregister(address addr) external;
    function updateOperator(
        address registrant,
        address operator,
        bool filtered
    ) external;
    function updateOperators(
        address registrant,
        address[] calldata operators,
        bool filtered
    ) external;
    function updateCodeHash(
        address registrant,
        bytes32 codehash,
        bool filtered
    ) external;
    function updateCodeHashes(
        address registrant,
        bytes32[] calldata codeHashes,
        bool filtered
    ) external;
    function subscribe(address registrant, address registrantToSubscribe) external;
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external;
    function subscriptionOf(address addr) external returns (address registrant);
    function subscribers(address registrant) external returns (address[] memory);
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external returns (bool);
    function filteredOperators(address addr) external returns (address[] memory);
    function filteredCodeHashes(address addr) external returns (bytes32[] memory);
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (bytes32);
    function isRegistered(address addr) external returns (bool);
    function codeHashOf(address addr) external returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
interface IOperatorFilterToggle {
    event OperatorRestriction(bool restriction);
    function operatorRestriction() external view returns (bool);
    function setOperatorRestriction(bool restriction) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 *  Thirdweb's `Ownable` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
 *  who the 'owner' of the inheriting smart contract is, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses
 *  information about who the contract's owner is.
 */
interface IOwnable {
    /// @dev Returns the owner of the contract.
    function owner() external view returns (address);
    /// @dev Lets a module admin set a new owner for the contract. The new owner must be a module admin.
    function setOwner(address _newOwner) external;
    /// @dev Emitted when a new Owner is set.
    event OwnerUpdated(address indexed prevOwner, address indexed newOwner);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 * @dev External interface of AccessControl declared to support ERC165 detection.
 */
interface IPermissions {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `newAdminRole` is set as ``role``'s admin role, replacing `previousAdminRole`
     *
     * `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE` is the starting admin for all roles, despite
     * {RoleAdminChanged} not being emitted signaling this.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    event RoleAdminChanged(bytes32 indexed role, bytes32 indexed previousAdminRole, bytes32 indexed newAdminRole);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` is granted `role`.
     *
     * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call, an admin role
     * bearer except when using {AccessControl-_setupRole}.
     */
    event RoleGranted(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` is revoked `role`.
     *
     * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call:
     *   - if using `revokeRole`, it is the admin role bearer
     *   - if using `renounceRole`, it is the role bearer (i.e. `account`)
     */
    event RoleRevoked(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);
    /**
     * @dev Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     */
    function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) external view returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the admin role that controls `role`. See {grantRole} and
     * {revokeRole}.
     *
     * To change a role's admin, use {AccessControl-_setRoleAdmin}.
     */
    function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) external view returns (bytes32);
    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     */
    function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     */
    function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from the calling account.
     *
     * Roles are often managed via {grantRole} and {revokeRole}: this function's
     * purpose is to provide a mechanism for accounts to lose their privileges
     * if they are compromised (such as when a trusted device is misplaced).
     *
     * If the calling account had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must be `account`.
     */
    function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./IPermissions.sol";
/**
 * @dev External interface of AccessControlEnumerable declared to support ERC165 detection.
 */
interface IPermissionsEnumerable is IPermissions {
    /**
     * @dev Returns one of the accounts that have `role`. `index` must be a
     * value between 0 and {getRoleMemberCount}, non-inclusive.
     *
     * Role bearers are not sorted in any particular way, and their ordering may
     * change at any point.
     *
     * WARNING: When using {getRoleMember} and {getRoleMemberCount}, make sure
     * you perform all queries on the same block. See the following
     * [forum post](https://forum.openzeppelin.com/t/iterating-over-elements-on-enumerableset-in-openzeppelin-contracts/2296)
     * for more information.
     */
    function getRoleMember(bytes32 role, uint256 index) external view returns (address);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of accounts that have `role`. Can be used
     * together with {getRoleMember} to enumerate all bearers of a role.
     */
    function getRoleMemberCount(bytes32 role) external view returns (uint256);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 *  Thirdweb's `Primary` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
 *  the recipient of primary sales, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses information about
 *  primary sales, if desired.
 */
interface IPrimarySale {
    /// @dev The adress that receives all primary sales value.
    function primarySaleRecipient() external view returns (address);
    /// @dev Lets a module admin set the default recipient of all primary sales.
    function setPrimarySaleRecipient(address _saleRecipient) external;
    /// @dev Emitted when a new sale recipient is set.
    event PrimarySaleRecipientUpdated(address indexed recipient);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "../../eip/interface/IERC2981.sol";
/**
 *  Thirdweb's `Royalty` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
 *  the recipient of royalty fee and the royalty fee basis points, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic
 *  that uses information about royalty fees, if desired.
 *
 *  The `Royalty` contract is ERC2981 compliant.
 */
interface IRoyalty is IERC2981 {
    struct RoyaltyInfo {
        address recipient;
        uint256 bps;
    }
    /// @dev Returns the royalty recipient and fee bps.
    function getDefaultRoyaltyInfo() external view returns (address, uint16);
    /// @dev Lets a module admin update the royalty bps and recipient.
    function setDefaultRoyaltyInfo(address _royaltyRecipient, uint256 _royaltyBps) external;
    /// @dev Lets a module admin set the royalty recipient for a particular token Id.
    function setRoyaltyInfoForToken(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address recipient,
        uint256 bps
    ) external;
    /// @dev Returns the royalty recipient for a particular token Id.
    function getRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address, uint16);
    /// @dev Emitted when royalty info is updated.
    event DefaultRoyalty(address indexed newRoyaltyRecipient, uint256 newRoyaltyBps);
    /// @dev Emitted when royalty recipient for tokenId is set
    event RoyaltyForToken(uint256 indexed tokenId, address indexed royaltyRecipient, uint256 royaltyBps);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;
/// @author thirdweb
interface ISharedMetadata {
    /// @notice Emitted when shared metadata is lazy minted.
    event SharedMetadataUpdated(string name, string description, string imageURI, string animationURI);
    /**
     *  @notice Structure for metadata shared across all tokens
     *
     *  @param name Shared name of NFT in metadata
     *  @param description Shared description of NFT in metadata
     *  @param imageURI Shared URI of image to render for NFTs
     *  @param animationURI Shared URI of animation to render for NFTs
     */
    struct SharedMetadataInfo {
        string name;
        string description;
        string imageURI;
        string animationURI;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice Set shared metadata for NFTs
     *  @param _metadata common metadata for all tokens
     */
    function setSharedMetadata(SharedMetadataInfo calldata _metadata) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
interface IWETH {
    function deposit() external payable;
    function withdraw(uint256 amount) external;
    function transfer(address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
// Helper interfaces
import { IWETH } from "../interfaces/IWETH.sol";
import "../openzeppelin-presets/token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol";
library CurrencyTransferLib {
    using SafeERC20 for IERC20;
    /// @dev The address interpreted as native token of the chain.
    address public constant NATIVE_TOKEN = 0xEeeeeEeeeEeEeeEeEeEeeEEEeeeeEeeeeeeeEEeE;
    /// @dev Transfers a given amount of currency.
    function transferCurrency(
        address _currency,
        address _from,
        address _to,
        uint256 _amount
    ) internal {
        if (_amount == 0) {
            return;
        }
        if (_currency == NATIVE_TOKEN) {
            safeTransferNativeToken(_to, _amount);
        } else {
            safeTransferERC20(_currency, _from, _to, _amount);
        }
    }
    /// @dev Transfers a given amount of currency. (With native token wrapping)
    function transferCurrencyWithWrapper(
        address _currency,
        address _from,
        address _to,
        uint256 _amount,
        address _nativeTokenWrapper
    ) internal {
        if (_amount == 0) {
            return;
        }
        if (_currency == NATIVE_TOKEN) {
            if (_from == address(this)) {
                // withdraw from weth then transfer withdrawn native token to recipient
                IWETH(_nativeTokenWrapper).withdraw(_amount);
                safeTransferNativeTokenWithWrapper(_to, _amount, _nativeTokenWrapper);
            } else if (_to == address(this)) {
                // store native currency in weth
                require(_amount == msg.value, "msg.value != amount");
                IWETH(_nativeTokenWrapper).deposit{ value: _amount }();
            } else {
                safeTransferNativeTokenWithWrapper(_to, _amount, _nativeTokenWrapper);
            }
        } else {
            safeTransferERC20(_currency, _from, _to, _amount);
        }
    }
    /// @dev Transfer `amount` of ERC20 token from `from` to `to`.
    function safeTransferERC20(
        address _currency,
        address _from,
        address _to,
        uint256 _amount
    ) internal {
        if (_from == _to) {
            return;
        }
        if (_from == address(this)) {
            IERC20(_currency).safeTransfer(_to, _amount);
        } else {
            IERC20(_currency).safeTransferFrom(_from, _to, _amount);
        }
    }
    /// @dev Transfers `amount` of native token to `to`.
    function safeTransferNativeToken(address to, uint256 value) internal {
        // solhint-disable avoid-low-level-calls
        // slither-disable-next-line low-level-calls
        (bool success, ) = to.call{ value: value }("");
        require(success, "native token transfer failed");
    }
    /// @dev Transfers `amount` of native token to `to`. (With native token wrapping)
    function safeTransferNativeTokenWithWrapper(
        address to,
        uint256 value,
        address _nativeTokenWrapper
    ) internal {
        // solhint-disable avoid-low-level-calls
        // slither-disable-next-line low-level-calls
        (bool success, ) = to.call{ value: value }("");
        if (!success) {
            IWETH(_nativeTokenWrapper).deposit{ value: value }();
            IERC20(_nativeTokenWrapper).safeTransfer(to, value);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 * @dev These functions deal with verification of Merkle Trees proofs.
 *
 * The proofs can be generated using the JavaScript library
 * https://github.com/miguelmota/merkletreejs[merkletreejs].
 * Note: the hashing algorithm should be keccak256 and pair sorting should be enabled.
 *
 * See `test/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.test.js` for some examples.
 *
 * Source: https://github.com/ensdomains/governance/blob/master/contracts/MerkleProof.sol
 */
library MerkleProof {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if a `leaf` can be proved to be a part of a Merkle tree
     * defined by `root`. For this, a `proof` must be provided, containing
     * sibling hashes on the branch from the leaf to the root of the tree. Each
     * pair of leaves and each pair of pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function verify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        uint256 index = 0;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            index *= 2;
            bytes32 proofElement = proof[i];
            if (computedHash <= proofElement) {
                // Hash(current computed hash + current element of the proof)
                computedHash = keccak256(abi.encodePacked(computedHash, proofElement));
            } else {
                // Hash(current element of the proof + current computed hash)
                computedHash = keccak256(abi.encodePacked(proofElement, computedHash));
                index += 1;
            }
        }
        // Check if the computed hash (root) is equal to the provided root
        return (computedHash == root, index);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;
/* solhint-disable quotes */
/// @author thirdweb
/// credits: Zora
import "./TWStrings.sol";
import "../openzeppelin-presets/utils/Base64.sol";
/// NFT metadata library for rendering metadata associated with editions
library NFTMetadataRenderer {
    /**
     *  @notice Generate edition metadata from storage information as base64-json blob
     *  @dev Combines the media data and metadata
     * @param name Name of NFT in metadata
     * @param description Description of NFT in metadata
     * @param imageURI URI of image to render for edition
     * @param animationURI URI of animation to render for edition
     * @param tokenOfEdition Token ID for specific token
     */
    function createMetadataEdition(
        string memory name,
        string memory description,
        string memory imageURI,
        string memory animationURI,
        uint256 tokenOfEdition
    ) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        string memory _tokenMediaData = tokenMediaData(imageURI, animationURI);
        bytes memory json = createMetadataJSON(name, description, _tokenMediaData, tokenOfEdition);
        return encodeMetadataJSON(json);
    }
    /**
     * @param name Name of NFT in metadata
     * @param description Description of NFT in metadata
     * @param mediaData Data for media to include in json object
     * @param tokenOfEdition Token ID for specific token
     */
    function createMetadataJSON(
        string memory name,
        string memory description,
        string memory mediaData,
        uint256 tokenOfEdition
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        return
            abi.encodePacked(
                '{"name": "',
                name,
                " ",
                TWStrings.toString(tokenOfEdition),
                '", "',
                'description": "',
                description,
                '", "',
                mediaData,
                'properties": {"number": ',
                TWStrings.toString(tokenOfEdition),
                ', "name": "',
                name,
                '"}}'
            );
    }
    /// Encodes the argument json bytes into base64-data uri format
    /// @param json Raw json to base64 and turn into a data-uri
    function encodeMetadataJSON(bytes memory json) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        return string(abi.encodePacked("data:application/json;base64,", Base64.encode(json)));
    }
    /// Generates edition metadata from storage information as base64-json blob
    /// Combines the media data and metadata
    /// @param imageUrl URL of image to render for edition
    /// @param animationUrl URL of animation to render for edition
    function tokenMediaData(string memory imageUrl, string memory animationUrl) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        bool hasImage = bytes(imageUrl).length > 0;
        bool hasAnimation = bytes(animationUrl).length > 0;
        if (hasImage && hasAnimation) {
            return string(abi.encodePacked('image": "', imageUrl, '", "animation_url": "', animationUrl, '", "'));
        }
        if (hasImage) {
            return string(abi.encodePacked('image": "', imageUrl, '", "'));
        }
        if (hasAnimation) {
            return string(abi.encodePacked('animation_url": "', animationUrl, '", "'));
        }
        return "";
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library TWAddress {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.
        return account.code.length > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * [EIP1884](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884) increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{ value: amount }("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCall(target, data, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{ value: value }(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        require(isContract(target), "Address: static call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a delegate call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.4._
     */
    function functionDelegateCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionDelegateCall(target, data, "Address: low-level delegate call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a delegate call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.4._
     */
    function functionDelegateCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(isContract(target), "Address: delegate call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.delegatecall(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verifies that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
            if (returndata.length > 0) {
                // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
                assembly {
                    let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                    revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
                }
            } else {
                revert(errorMessage);
            }
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 * @dev String operations.
 */
library TWStrings {
    bytes16 private constant _HEX_SYMBOLS = "0123456789abcdef";
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
     */
    function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        // Inspired by OraclizeAPI's implementation - MIT licence
        // https://github.com/oraclize/ethereum-api/blob/b42146b063c7d6ee1358846c198246239e9360e8/oraclizeAPI_0.4.25.sol
        if (value == 0) {
            return "0";
        }
        uint256 temp = value;
        uint256 digits;
        while (temp != 0) {
            digits++;
            temp /= 10;
        }
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(digits);
        while (value != 0) {
            digits -= 1;
            buffer[digits] = bytes1(uint8(48 + uint256(value % 10)));
            value /= 10;
        }
        return string(buffer);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        if (value == 0) {
            return "0x00";
        }
        uint256 temp = value;
        uint256 length = 0;
        while (temp != 0) {
            length++;
            temp >>= 8;
        }
        return toHexString(value, length);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
        buffer[0] = "0";
        buffer[1] = "x";
        for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
            buffer[i] = _HEX_SYMBOLS[value & 0xf];
            value >>= 4;
        }
        require(value == 0, "Strings: hex length insufficient");
        return string(buffer);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.0 (metatx/ERC2771Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.11;
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Context variant with ERC2771 support.
 */
abstract contract ERC2771ContextUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    mapping(address => bool) private _trustedForwarder;
    function __ERC2771Context_init(address[] memory trustedForwarder) internal onlyInitializing {
        __Context_init_unchained();
        __ERC2771Context_init_unchained(trustedForwarder);
    }
    function __ERC2771Context_init_unchained(address[] memory trustedForwarder) internal onlyInitializing {
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < trustedForwarder.length; i++) {
            _trustedForwarder[trustedForwarder[i]] = true;
        }
    }
    function isTrustedForwarder(address forwarder) public view virtual returns (bool) {
        return _trustedForwarder[forwarder];
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual override returns (address sender) {
        if (isTrustedForwarder(msg.sender)) {
            // The assembly code is more direct than the Solidity version using `abi.decode`.
            assembly {
                sender := shr(96, calldataload(sub(calldatasize(), 20)))
            }
        } else {
            return super._msgSender();
        }
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual override returns (bytes calldata) {
        if (isTrustedForwarder(msg.sender)) {
            return msg.data[:msg.data.length - 20];
        } else {
            return super._msgData();
        }
    }
    uint256[49] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../../../../eip/interface/IERC20.sol";
import "../../../../lib/TWAddress.sol";
/**
 * @title SafeERC20
 * @dev Wrappers around ERC20 operations that throw on failure (when the token
 * contract returns false). Tokens that return no value (and instead revert or
 * throw on failure) are also supported, non-reverting calls are assumed to be
 * successful.
 * To use this library you can add a `using SafeERC20 for IERC20;` statement to your contract,
 * which allows you to call the safe operations as `token.safeTransfer(...)`, etc.
 */
library SafeERC20 {
    using TWAddress for address;
    function safeTransfer(
        IERC20 token,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transfer.selector, to, value));
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        IERC20 token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transferFrom.selector, from, to, value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Deprecated. This function has issues similar to the ones found in
     * {IERC20-approve}, and its usage is discouraged.
     *
     * Whenever possible, use {safeIncreaseAllowance} and
     * {safeDecreaseAllowance} instead.
     */
    function safeApprove(
        IERC20 token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        // safeApprove should only be called when setting an initial allowance,
        // or when resetting it to zero. To increase and decrease it, use
        // 'safeIncreaseAllowance' and 'safeDecreaseAllowance'
        require(
            (value == 0) || (token.allowance(address(this), spender) == 0),
            "SafeERC20: approve from non-zero to non-zero allowance"
        );
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, value));
    }
    function safeIncreaseAllowance(
        IERC20 token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        uint256 newAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender) + value;
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
    }
    function safeDecreaseAllowance(
        IERC20 token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        unchecked {
            uint256 oldAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
            require(oldAllowance >= value, "SafeERC20: decreased allowance below zero");
            uint256 newAllowance = oldAllowance - value;
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
     * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
     * @param token The token targeted by the call.
     * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
     */
    function _callOptionalReturn(IERC20 token, bytes memory data) private {
        // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
        // we're implementing it ourselves. We use {Address.functionCall} to perform this call, which verifies that
        // the target address contains contract code and also asserts for success in the low-level call.
        bytes memory returndata = address(token).functionCall(data, "SafeERC20: low-level call failed");
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // Return data is optional
            require(abi.decode(returndata, (bool)), "SafeERC20: ERC20 operation did not succeed");
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (utils/Base64.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Provides a set of functions to operate with Base64 strings.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
library Base64 {
    /**
     * @dev Base64 Encoding/Decoding Table
     */
    string internal constant _TABLE = "ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789+/";
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `bytes` to its Bytes64 `string` representation.
     */
    function encode(bytes memory data) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        /**
         * Inspired by Brecht Devos (Brechtpd) implementation - MIT licence
         * https://github.com/Brechtpd/base64/blob/e78d9fd951e7b0977ddca77d92dc85183770daf4/base64.sol
         */
        if (data.length == 0) return "";
        // Loads the table into memory
        string memory table = _TABLE;
        // Encoding takes 3 bytes chunks of binary data from `bytes` data parameter
        // and split into 4 numbers of 6 bits.
        // The final Base64 length should be `bytes` data length multiplied by 4/3 rounded up
        // - `data.length + 2`  -> Round up
        // - `/ 3`              -> Number of 3-bytes chunks
        // - `4 *`              -> 4 characters for each chunk
        string memory result = new string(4 * ((data.length + 2) / 3));
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            // Prepare the lookup table (skip the first "length" byte)
            let tablePtr := add(table, 1)
            // Prepare result pointer, jump over length
            let resultPtr := add(result, 32)
            // Run over the input, 3 bytes at a time
            for {
                let dataPtr := data
                let endPtr := add(data, mload(data))
            } lt(dataPtr, endPtr) {
            } {
                // Advance 3 bytes
                dataPtr := add(dataPtr, 3)
                let input := mload(dataPtr)
                // To write each character, shift the 3 bytes (18 bits) chunk
                // 4 times in blocks of 6 bits for each character (18, 12, 6, 0)
                // and apply logical AND with 0x3F which is the number of
                // the previous character in the ASCII table prior to the Base64 Table
                // The result is then added to the table to get the character to write,
                // and finally write it in the result pointer but with a left shift
                // of 256 (1 byte) - 8 (1 ASCII char) = 248 bits
                mstore8(resultPtr, mload(add(tablePtr, and(shr(18, input), 0x3F))))
                resultPtr := add(resultPtr, 1) // Advance
                mstore8(resultPtr, mload(add(tablePtr, and(shr(12, input), 0x3F))))
                resultPtr := add(resultPtr, 1) // Advance
                mstore8(resultPtr, mload(add(tablePtr, and(shr(6, input), 0x3F))))
                resultPtr := add(resultPtr, 1) // Advance
                mstore8(resultPtr, mload(add(tablePtr, and(input, 0x3F))))
                resultPtr := add(resultPtr, 1) // Advance
            }
            // When data `bytes` is not exactly 3 bytes long
            // it is padded with `=` characters at the end
            switch mod(mload(data), 3)
            case 1 {
                mstore8(sub(resultPtr, 1), 0x3d)
                mstore8(sub(resultPtr, 2), 0x3d)
            }
            case 2 {
                mstore8(sub(resultPtr, 1), 0x3d)
            }
        }
        return result;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
interface IERC2981Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (proxy/utils/Initializable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.2;
import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * The initialization functions use a version number. Once a version number is used, it is consumed and cannot be
 * reused. This mechanism prevents re-execution of each "step" but allows the creation of new initialization steps in
 * case an upgrade adds a module that needs to be initialized.
 *
 * For example:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * contract MyToken is ERC20Upgradeable {
 *     function initialize() initializer public {
 *         __ERC20_init("MyToken", "MTK");
 *     }
 * }
 * contract MyTokenV2 is MyToken, ERC20PermitUpgradeable {
 *     function initializeV2() reinitializer(2) public {
 *         __ERC20Permit_init("MyToken");
 *     }
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 *
 * [CAUTION]
 * ====
 * Avoid leaving a contract uninitialized.
 *
 * An uninitialized contract can be taken over by an attacker. This applies to both a proxy and its implementation
 * contract, which may impact the proxy. To prevent the implementation contract from being used, you should invoke
 * the {_disableInitializers} function in the constructor to automatically lock it when it is deployed:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
 * constructor() {
 *     _disableInitializers();
 * }
 * ```
 * ====
 */
abstract contract Initializable {
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
     * @custom:oz-retyped-from bool
     */
    uint8 private _initialized;
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
     */
    bool private _initializing;
    /**
     * @dev Triggered when the contract has been initialized or reinitialized.
     */
    event Initialized(uint8 version);
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected initializer function that can be invoked at most once. In its scope,
     * `onlyInitializing` functions can be used to initialize parent contracts. Equivalent to `reinitializer(1)`.
     */
    modifier initializer() {
        bool isTopLevelCall = !_initializing;
        require(
            (isTopLevelCall && _initialized < 1) || (!AddressUpgradeable.isContract(address(this)) && _initialized == 1),
            "Initializable: contract is already initialized"
        );
        _initialized = 1;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = false;
            emit Initialized(1);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected reinitializer function that can be invoked at most once, and only if the
     * contract hasn't been initialized to a greater version before. In its scope, `onlyInitializing` functions can be
     * used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * `initializer` is equivalent to `reinitializer(1)`, so a reinitializer may be used after the original
     * initialization step. This is essential to configure modules that are added through upgrades and that require
     * initialization.
     *
     * Note that versions can jump in increments greater than 1; this implies that if multiple reinitializers coexist in
     * a contract, executing them in the right order is up to the developer or operator.
     */
    modifier reinitializer(uint8 version) {
        require(!_initializing && _initialized < version, "Initializable: contract is already initialized");
        _initialized = version;
        _initializing = true;
        _;
        _initializing = false;
        emit Initialized(version);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} and {reinitializer} modifiers, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializing() {
        require(_initializing, "Initializable: contract is not initializing");
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Locks the contract, preventing any future reinitialization. This cannot be part of an initializer call.
     * Calling this in the constructor of a contract will prevent that contract from being initialized or reinitialized
     * to any version. It is recommended to use this to lock implementation contracts that are designed to be called
     * through proxies.
     */
    function _disableInitializers() internal virtual {
        require(!_initializing, "Initializable: contract is initializing");
        if (_initialized < type(uint8).max) {
            _initialized = type(uint8).max;
            emit Initialized(type(uint8).max);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (utils/Address.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library AddressUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.
        return account.code.length > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCall(target, data, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        require(isContract(target), "Address: static call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verifies that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
            if (returndata.length > 0) {
                // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                    revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
                }
            } else {
                revert(errorMessage);
            }
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract ContextUpgradeable is Initializable {
    function __Context_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __Context_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (utils/Strings.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev String operations.
 */
library StringsUpgradeable {
    bytes16 private constant _HEX_SYMBOLS = "0123456789abcdef";
    uint8 private constant _ADDRESS_LENGTH = 20;
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
     */
    function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        // Inspired by OraclizeAPI's implementation - MIT licence
        // https://github.com/oraclize/ethereum-api/blob/b42146b063c7d6ee1358846c198246239e9360e8/oraclizeAPI_0.4.25.sol
        if (value == 0) {
            return "0";
        }
        uint256 temp = value;
        uint256 digits;
        while (temp != 0) {
            digits++;
            temp /= 10;
        }
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(digits);
        while (value != 0) {
            digits -= 1;
            buffer[digits] = bytes1(uint8(48 + uint256(value % 10)));
            value /= 10;
        }
        return string(buffer);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        if (value == 0) {
            return "0x00";
        }
        uint256 temp = value;
        uint256 length = 0;
        while (temp != 0) {
            length++;
            temp >>= 8;
        }
        return toHexString(value, length);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
        buffer[0] = "0";
        buffer[1] = "x";
        for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
            buffer[i] = _HEX_SYMBOLS[value & 0xf];
            value >>= 4;
        }
        require(value == 0, "Strings: hex length insufficient");
        return string(buffer);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts an `address` with fixed length of 20 bytes to its not checksummed ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(address addr) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        return toHexString(uint256(uint160(addr)), _ADDRESS_LENGTH);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.11;
/// @author thirdweb
//   $$\\     $$\\       $$\\                 $$\\                         $$\\
//   $$ |    $$ |      \\__|                $$ |                        $$ |
// $$$$$$\\   $$$$$$$\\  $$\\  $$$$$$\\   $$$$$$$ |$$\\  $$\\  $$\\  $$$$$$\\  $$$$$$$\\
// \\_$$  _|  $$  __$$\\ $$ |$$  __$$\\ $$  __$$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$  __$$\\ $$  __$$\\
//   $$ |    $$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |  \\__|$$ /  $$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$$$$$$$ |$$ |  $$ |
//   $$ |$$\\ $$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |      $$ |  $$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$   ____|$$ |  $$ |
//   \\$$$$  |$$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |      \\$$$$$$$ |\\$$$$$\\$$$$  |\\$$$$$$$\\ $$$$$$$  |
//    \\____/ \\__|  \\__|\\__|\\__|       \\_______| \\_____\\____/  \\_______|\\_______/
//  ==========  External imports    ==========
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/StringsUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/interfaces/IERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
import "./eip/queryable/ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol";
//  ==========  Internal imports    ==========
import "./openzeppelin-presets/metatx/ERC2771ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "./lib/CurrencyTransferLib.sol";
//  ==========  Features    ==========
import "./extension/Multicall.sol";
import "./extension/ContractMetadata.sol";
import "./extension/Royalty.sol";
import "./extension/PrimarySale.sol";
import "./extension/Ownable.sol";
import "./extension/SharedMetadata.sol";
import "./extension/PermissionsEnumerable.sol";
import "./extension/Drop.sol";
// OpenSea operator filter
import "./extension/DefaultOperatorFiltererUpgradeable.sol";
contract OpenEditionERC721 is
    Initializable,
    ContractMetadata,
    Royalty,
    PrimarySale,
    Ownable,
    SharedMetadata,
    PermissionsEnumerable,
    Drop,
    ERC2771ContextUpgradeable,
    Multicall,
    DefaultOperatorFiltererUpgradeable,
    ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable
{
    using StringsUpgradeable for uint256;
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            State variables
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev Only transfers to or from TRANSFER_ROLE holders are valid, when transfers are restricted.
    bytes32 private transferRole;
    /// @dev Only MINTER_ROLE holders can update the shared metadata of tokens.
    bytes32 private minterRole;
    /// @dev Max bps in the thirdweb system.
    uint256 private constant MAX_BPS = 10_000;
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                    Constructor + initializer logic
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    constructor() initializer {}
    /// @dev Initiliazes the contract, like a constructor.
    function initialize(
        address _defaultAdmin,
        string memory _name,
        string memory _symbol,
        string memory _contractURI,
        address[] memory _trustedForwarders,
        address _saleRecipient,
        address _royaltyRecipient,
        uint128 _royaltyBps
    ) external initializerERC721A initializer {
        bytes32 _transferRole = keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE");
        bytes32 _minterRole = keccak256("MINTER_ROLE");
        // Initialize inherited contracts, most base-like -> most derived.
        __ERC2771Context_init(_trustedForwarders);
        __ERC721A_init(_name, _symbol);
        __DefaultOperatorFilterer_init();
        _setupContractURI(_contractURI);
        _setupOwner(_defaultAdmin);
        _setOperatorRestriction(true);
        _setupRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _defaultAdmin);
        _setupRole(_minterRole, _defaultAdmin);
        _setupRole(_transferRole, _defaultAdmin);
        _setupRole(_transferRole, address(0));
        _setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo(_royaltyRecipient, _royaltyBps);
        _setupPrimarySaleRecipient(_saleRecipient);
        transferRole = _transferRole;
        minterRole = _minterRole;
    }
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                        ERC 165 / 721 / 2981 logic
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev Returns the URI for a given tokenId.
    function tokenURI(uint256 _tokenId)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        returns (string memory)
    {
        if (!_exists(_tokenId)) {
            revert("!ID");
        }
        return _getURIFromSharedMetadata(_tokenId);
    }
    /// @dev See ERC 165
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC165, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return super.supportsInterface(interfaceId) || type(IERC2981Upgradeable).interfaceId == interfaceId;
    }
    /// @dev The start token ID for the contract.
    function _startTokenId() internal pure override returns (uint256) {
        return 1;
    }
    function startTokenId() public pure returns (uint256) {
        return _startTokenId();
    }
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                        Internal functions
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev Collects and distributes the primary sale value of NFTs being claimed.
    function _collectPriceOnClaim(
        address _primarySaleRecipient,
        uint256 _quantityToClaim,
        address _currency,
        uint256 _pricePerToken
    ) internal override {
        if (_pricePerToken == 0) {
            return;
        }
        uint256 totalPrice = _quantityToClaim * _pricePerToken;
        bool validMsgValue;
        if (_currency == CurrencyTransferLib.NATIVE_TOKEN) {
            validMsgValue = msg.value == totalPrice;
        } else {
            validMsgValue = msg.value == 0;
        }
        require(validMsgValue, "!V");
        address saleRecipient = _primarySaleRecipient == address(0) ? primarySaleRecipient() : _primarySaleRecipient;
        CurrencyTransferLib.transferCurrency(_currency, _msgSender(), saleRecipient, totalPrice);
    }
    /// @dev Transfers the NFTs being claimed.
    function _transferTokensOnClaim(address _to, uint256 _quantityBeingClaimed)
        internal
        override
        returns (uint256 startTokenId_)
    {
        startTokenId_ = _nextTokenId();
        _safeMint(_to, _quantityBeingClaimed);
    }
    /// @dev Checks whether primary sale recipient can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetPrimarySaleRecipient() internal view override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    /// @dev Checks whether owner can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetOwner() internal view override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    /// @dev Checks whether royalty info can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetRoyaltyInfo() internal view override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    /// @dev Checks whether contract metadata can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetContractURI() internal view override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    /// @dev Checks whether platform fee info can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetClaimConditions() internal view override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether the shared metadata of tokens can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetSharedMetadata() internal view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(minterRole, _msgSender());
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether operator restriction can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetOperatorRestriction() internal virtual override returns (bool) {
        return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
    }
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                        Miscellaneous
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /**
     * Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function totalMinted() external view returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            return _nextTokenId() - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /// @dev The tokenId of the next NFT that will be minted / lazy minted.
    function nextTokenIdToMint() external view returns (uint256) {
        return _nextTokenId();
    }
    /// @dev The next token ID of the NFT that can be claimed.
    function nextTokenIdToClaim() external view returns (uint256) {
        return _nextTokenId();
    }
    /// @dev Burns `tokenId`. See {ERC721-_burn}.
    function burn(uint256 tokenId) external virtual {
        // note: ERC721AUpgradeable's `_burn(uint256,bool)` internally checks for token approvals.
        _burn(tokenId, true);
    }
    /// @dev See {ERC721-_beforeTokenTransfer}.
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId_,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual override {
        super._beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, startTokenId_, quantity);
        // if transfer is restricted on the contract, we still want to allow burning and minting
        if (!hasRole(transferRole, address(0)) && from != address(0) && to != address(0)) {
            if (!hasRole(transferRole, from) && !hasRole(transferRole, to)) {
                revert("!T");
            }
        }
    }
    /// @dev See {ERC721-setApprovalForAll}.
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved)
        public
        override(IERC721AUpgradeable, ERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.setApprovalForAll(operator, approved);
    }
    /// @dev See {ERC721-approve}.
    function approve(address operator, uint256 tokenId)
        public
        payable
        override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable)
        onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(operator)
    {
        super.approve(operator, tokenId);
    }
    /// @dev See {ERC721-_transferFrom}.
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable) onlyAllowedOperator(from) {
        super.transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    /// @dev See {ERC721-_safeTransferFrom}.
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable) onlyAllowedOperator(from) {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
    }
    /// @dev See {ERC721-_safeTransferFrom}.
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory data
    ) public payable override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable) onlyAllowedOperator(from) {
        super.safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, data);
    }
    function _dropMsgSender() internal view virtual override returns (address) {
        return _msgSender();
    }
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual override returns (address) {
        return _msgSender();
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual override(ERC2771ContextUpgradeable) returns (address sender) {
        return ERC2771ContextUpgradeable._msgSender();
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual override(ERC2771ContextUpgradeable) returns (bytes calldata) {
        return ERC2771ContextUpgradeable._msgData();
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * [EIP](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165).
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @title ERC20 interface
 * @dev see https://github.com/ethereum/EIPs/issues/20
 */
interface IERC20 {
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    function balanceOf(address who) external view returns (uint256);
    function allowance(address owner, address spender) external view returns (uint256);
    function transfer(address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
    function approve(address spender, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) external returns (bool);
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 value);
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed spender, uint256 value);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "./IERC165.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
interface IERC2981 is IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be payed in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.11;
import "./IERC165.sol";
import "./IERC721.sol";
interface IERC4906 is IERC165 {
    /// @dev This event emits when the metadata of a token is changed.
    /// So that the third-party platforms such as NFT market could
    /// timely update the images and related attributes of the NFT.
    event MetadataUpdate(uint256 _tokenId);
    /// @dev This event emits when the metadata of a range of tokens is changed.
    /// So that the third-party platforms such as NFT market could
    /// timely update the images and related attributes of the NFTs.
    event BatchMetadataUpdate(uint256 _fromTokenId, uint256 _toTokenId);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC721/IERC721.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Required interface of an ERC721 compliant contract.
 */
interface IERC721 {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in ``owner``'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address);
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`, checking first that contract recipients
     * are aware of the ERC721 protocol to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external;
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom} whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external;
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address);
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom} for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import "./IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable.sol";
import "./ERC721AUpgradeable.sol";
import "./ERC721A__Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @title ERC721AQueryable.
 *
 * @dev ERC721A subclass with convenience query functions.
 */
abstract contract ERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is
    ERC721A__Initializable,
    ERC721AUpgradeable,
    IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable
{
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained();
    }
    function __ERC721AQueryable_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializingERC721A {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId)
        public
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership)
    {
        unchecked {
            if (tokenId >= _startTokenId()) {
                if (tokenId < _nextTokenId()) {
                    // If the `tokenId` is within bounds,
                    // scan backwards for the initialized ownership slot.
                    while (!_ownershipIsInitialized(tokenId)) --tokenId;
                    return _ownershipAt(tokenId);
                }
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        return _tokensOfOwnerIn(owner, start, stop);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        uint256 start = _startTokenId();
        uint256 stop = _nextTokenId();
        uint256[] memory tokenIds;
        if (start != stop) tokenIds = _tokensOfOwnerIn(owner, start, stop);
        return tokenIds;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Helper function for returning an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * Note that this function is optimized for smaller bytecode size over runtime gas,
     * since it is meant to be called off-chain.
     */
    function _tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) private view returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            if (start >= stop) _revert(InvalidQueryRange.selector);
            // Set `start = max(start, _startTokenId())`.
            if (start < _startTokenId()) {
                start = _startTokenId();
            }
            uint256 stopLimit = _nextTokenId();
            // Set `stop = min(stop, stopLimit)`.
            if (stop >= stopLimit) {
                stop = stopLimit;
            }
            uint256[] memory tokenIds;
            uint256 tokenIdsMaxLength = balanceOf(owner);
            bool startLtStop = start < stop;
            assembly {
                // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength` to zero if `start` is less than `stop`.
                tokenIdsMaxLength := mul(tokenIdsMaxLength, startLtStop)
            }
            if (tokenIdsMaxLength != 0) {
                // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength = min(balanceOf(owner), stop - start)`,
                // to cater for cases where `balanceOf(owner)` is too big.
                if (stop - start <= tokenIdsMaxLength) {
                    tokenIdsMaxLength = stop - start;
                }
                assembly {
                    // Grab the free memory pointer.
                    tokenIds := mload(0x40)
                    // Allocate one word for the length, and `tokenIdsMaxLength` words
                    // for the data. `shl(5, x)` is equivalent to `mul(32, x)`.
                    mstore(0x40, add(tokenIds, shl(5, add(tokenIdsMaxLength, 1))))
                }
                // We need to call `explicitOwnershipOf(start)`,
                // because the slot at `start` may not be initialized.
                TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(start);
                address currOwnershipAddr;
                // If the starting slot exists (i.e. not burned),
                // initialize `currOwnershipAddr`.
                // `ownership.address` will not be zero,
                // as `start` is clamped to the valid token ID range.
                if (!ownership.burned) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
                // Use a do-while, which is slightly more efficient for this case,
                // as the array will at least contain one element.
                do {
                    ownership = _ownershipAt(start);
                    assembly {
                        switch mload(add(ownership, 0x40))
                        // if `ownership.burned == false`.
                        case 0 {
                            // if `ownership.addr != address(0)`.
                            // The `addr` already has it's upper 96 bits clearned,
                            // since it is written to memory with regular Solidity.
                            if mload(ownership) {
                                currOwnershipAddr := mload(ownership)
                            }
                            // if `currOwnershipAddr == owner`.
                            // The `shl(96, x)` is to make the comparison agnostic to any
                            // dirty upper 96 bits in `owner`.
                            if iszero(shl(96, xor(currOwnershipAddr, owner))) {
                                tokenIdsIdx := add(tokenIdsIdx, 1)
                                mstore(add(tokenIds, shl(5, tokenIdsIdx)), start)
                            }
                        }
                        // Otherwise, reset `currOwnershipAddr`.
                        // This handles the case of batch burned tokens
                        // (burned bit of first slot set, remaining slots left uninitialized).
                        default {
                            currOwnershipAddr := 0
                        }
                        start := add(start, 1)
                    }
                } while (!(start == stop || tokenIdsIdx == tokenIdsMaxLength));
                // Store the length of the array.
                assembly {
                    mstore(tokenIds, tokenIdsIdx)
                }
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
library ERC721AStorage {
    // Bypass for a `--via-ir` bug (https://github.com/chiru-labs/ERC721A/pull/364).
    struct TokenApprovalRef {
        address value;
    }
    struct Layout {
        // =============================================================
        //                            STORAGE
        // =============================================================
        // The next token ID to be minted.
        uint256 _currentIndex;
        // The number of tokens burned.
        uint256 _burnCounter;
        // Token name
        string _name;
        // Token symbol
        string _symbol;
        // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
        // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned.
        // See {_packedOwnershipOf} implementation for details.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..159]   `addr`
        // - [160..223] `startTimestamp`
        // - [224]      `burned`
        // - [225]      `nextInitialized`
        // - [232..255] `extraData`
        mapping(uint256 => uint256) _packedOwnerships;
        // Mapping owner address to address data.
        //
        // Bits Layout:
        // - [0..63]    `balance`
        // - [64..127]  `numberMinted`
        // - [128..191] `numberBurned`
        // - [192..255] `aux`
        mapping(address => uint256) _packedAddressData;
        // Mapping from token ID to approved address.
        mapping(uint256 => ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef) _tokenApprovals;
        // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
        mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) _operatorApprovals;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256("ERC721A.contracts.storage.ERC721A");
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import "./IERC721AUpgradeable.sol";
import { ERC721AStorage } from "./ERC721AStorage.sol";
import "./ERC721A__Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721 token receiver.
 */
interface ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable {
    function onERC721Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}
/**
 * @title ERC721A
 *
 * @dev Implementation of the [ERC721](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721)
 * Non-Fungible Token Standard, including the Metadata extension.
 * Optimized for lower gas during batch mints.
 *
 * Token IDs are minted in sequential order (e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3, ...)
 * starting from `_startTokenId()`.
 *
 * Assumptions:
 *
 * - An owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
 * - The maximum token ID cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
 */
contract ERC721AUpgradeable is ERC721A__Initializable, IERC721AUpgradeable {
    using ERC721AStorage for ERC721AStorage.Layout;
    // =============================================================
    //                           CONSTANTS
    // =============================================================
    // Mask of an entry in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY = (1 << 64) - 1;
    // The bit position of `numberMinted` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED = 64;
    // The bit position of `numberBurned` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED = 128;
    // The bit position of `aux` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_AUX = 192;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in packed address data except the 64 bits for `aux`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 192) - 1;
    // The bit position of `startTimestamp` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP = 160;
    // The bit mask of the `burned` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_BURNED = 1 << 224;
    // The bit position of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 225;
    // The bit mask of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 1 << 225;
    // The bit position of `extraData` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA = 232;
    // Mask of all 256 bits in a packed ownership except the 24 bits for `extraData`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 232) - 1;
    // The mask of the lower 160 bits for addresses.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS = (1 << 160) - 1;
    // The maximum `quantity` that can be minted with {_mintERC2309}.
    // This limit is to prevent overflows on the address data entries.
    // For a limit of 5000, a total of 3.689e15 calls to {_mintERC2309}
    // is required to cause an overflow, which is unrealistic.
    uint256 private constant _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT = 5000;
    // The `Transfer` event signature is given by:
    // `keccak256(bytes("Transfer(address,address,uint256)"))`.
    bytes32 private constant _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE =
        0xddf252ad1be2c89b69c2b068fc378daa952ba7f163c4a11628f55a4df523b3ef;
    // =============================================================
    //                          CONSTRUCTOR
    // =============================================================
    function __ERC721A_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
    }
    function __ERC721A_init_unchained(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializingERC721A {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._name = name_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol = symbol_;
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = _startTokenId();
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                   TOKEN COUNTING OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the starting token ID.
     * To change the starting token ID, please override this function.
     */
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next token ID to be minted.
     */
    function _nextTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as _burnCounter cannot be incremented
        // more than `_currentIndex - _startTokenId()` times.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function _totalMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_currentIndex` does not decrement,
        // and it is initialized to `_startTokenId()`.
        unchecked {
            return ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex - _startTokenId();
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens burned.
     */
    function _totalBurned() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                    ADDRESS DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        if (owner == address(0)) _revert(BalanceQueryForZeroAddress.selector);
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
     */
    function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
     */
    function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return
            (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }
    /**
     * Returns the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     */
    function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
        return uint64(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_AUX);
    }
    /**
     * Sets the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
     */
    function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner];
        uint256 auxCasted;
        // Cast `aux` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            auxCasted := aux
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT) | (auxCasted << _BITPOS_AUX);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[owner] = packed;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        // The interface IDs are constants representing the first 4 bytes
        // of the XOR of all function selectors in the interface.
        // See: [ERC165](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165)
        // (e.g. `bytes4(i.functionA.selector ^ i.functionB.selector ^ ...)`)
        return
            interfaceId == 0x01ffc9a7 || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC165.
            interfaceId == 0x80ac58cd || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721.
            interfaceId == 0x5b5e139f; // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721Metadata.
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._name;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._symbol;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) _revert(URIQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
        string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
        return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, _toString(tokenId))) : "";
    }
    /**
     * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
     * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
     * by default, it can be overridden in child contracts.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
        return "";
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     OWNERSHIPS OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId)));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
     * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around over time.
     */
    function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct at `index`.
     */
    function _ownershipAt(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index]);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether the ownership slot at `index` is initialized.
     * An uninitialized slot does not necessarily mean that the slot has no owner.
     */
    function _ownershipIsInitialized(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] != 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Initializes the ownership slot minted at `index` for efficiency purposes.
     */
    function _initializeOwnershipAt(uint256 index) internal virtual {
        if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] == 0) {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = _packedOwnershipOf(index);
        }
    }
    /**
     * Returns the packed ownership data of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) private view returns (uint256 packed) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId];
            // If the data at the starting slot does not exist, start the scan.
            if (packed == 0) {
                if (tokenId >= ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
                // Invariant:
                // There will always be an initialized ownership slot
                // (i.e. `ownership.addr != address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                // before an unintialized ownership slot
                // (i.e. `ownership.addr == address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                // Hence, `tokenId` will not underflow.
                //
                // We can directly compare the packed value.
                // If the address is zero, packed will be zero.
                for (;;) {
                    unchecked {
                        packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[--tokenId];
                    }
                    if (packed == 0) continue;
                    if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) return packed;
                    // Otherwise, the token is burned, and we must revert.
                    // This handles the case of batch burned tokens, where only the burned bit
                    // of the starting slot is set, and remaining slots are left uninitialized.
                    _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
                }
            }
            // Otherwise, the data exists and we can skip the scan.
            // This is possible because we have already achieved the target condition.
            // This saves 2143 gas on transfers of initialized tokens.
            // If the token is not burned, return `packed`. Otherwise, revert.
            if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) return packed;
        }
        _revert(OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct from `packed`.
     */
    function _unpackedOwnership(uint256 packed) private pure returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership) {
        ownership.addr = address(uint160(packed));
        ownership.startTimestamp = uint64(packed >> _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP);
        ownership.burned = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED != 0;
        ownership.extraData = uint24(packed >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Packs ownership data into a single uint256.
     */
    function _packOwnershipData(address owner, uint256 flags) private view returns (uint256 result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `owner | (block.timestamp << _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP) | flags`.
            result := or(owner, or(shl(_BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP, timestamp()), flags))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `nextInitialized` flag set if `quantity` equals 1.
     */
    function _nextInitializedFlag(uint256 quantity) private pure returns (uint256 result) {
        // For branchless setting of the `nextInitialized` flag.
        assembly {
            // `(quantity == 1) << _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED`.
            result := shl(_BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED, eq(quantity, 1))
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account. See {ERC721A-_approve}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public payable virtual override {
        _approve(to, tokenId, true);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) _revert(ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken.selector);
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[_msgSenderERC721A()][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSenderERC721A(), operator, approved);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return ERC721AStorage.layout()._operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
     *
     * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Tokens start existing when they are minted. See {_mint}.
     */
    function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (bool result) {
        if (_startTokenId() <= tokenId) {
            if (tokenId < ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                uint256 packed;
                while ((packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId]) == 0) --tokenId;
                result = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `msgSender` is equal to `approvedAddress` or `owner`.
     */
    function _isSenderApprovedOrOwner(
        address approvedAddress,
        address owner,
        address msgSender
    ) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // Mask `msgSender` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            msgSender := and(msgSender, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `msgSender == owner || msgSender == approvedAddress`.
            result := or(eq(msgSender, owner), eq(msgSender, approvedAddress))
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Returns the storage slot and value for the approved address of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(uint256 tokenId)
        private
        view
        returns (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress)
    {
        ERC721AStorage.TokenApprovalRef storage tokenApproval = ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        // The following is equivalent to `approvedAddress = _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value`.
        assembly {
            approvedAddressSlot := tokenApproval.slot
            approvedAddress := sload(approvedAddressSlot)
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                      TRANSFER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        // Mask `from` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
        from = address(uint160(uint256(uint160(from)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS));
        if (address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked)) != from) _revert(TransferFromIncorrectOwner.selector);
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
        if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
            if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) _revert(TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved.selector);
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // We can directly increment and decrement the balances.
            --ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from]; // Updates: `balance -= 1`.
            ++ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to]; // Updates: `balance += 1`.
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the next owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of transfering.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED | _nextExtraData(from, to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
        uint256 toMasked = uint256(uint160(to)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS;
        assembly {
            // Emit the `Transfer` event.
            log4(
                0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                from, // `from`.
                toMasked, // `to`.
                tokenId // `tokenId`.
            )
        }
        if (toMasked == 0) _revert(TransferToZeroAddress.selector);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, "");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
        if (to.code.length != 0)
            if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
            }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called before burning one token.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * have been transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called after one token has been burned.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}
    /**
     * @dev Private function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
     *
     * `from` - Previous owner of the given token ID.
     * `to` - Target address that will receive the token.
     * `tokenId` - Token ID to be transferred.
     * `_data` - Optional data to send along with the call.
     *
     * Returns whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value.
     */
    function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) private returns (bool) {
        try
            ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received(_msgSenderERC721A(), from, tokenId, _data)
        returns (bytes4 retval) {
            return retval == ERC721A__IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received.selector;
        } catch (bytes memory reason) {
            if (reason.length == 0) {
                _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
            }
            assembly {
                revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
            }
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        MINT OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (quantity == 0) _revert(MintZeroQuantity.selector);
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // `balance` and `numberMinted` have a maximum limit of 2**64.
        // `tokenId` has a maximum limit of 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            uint256 toMasked = uint256(uint160(to)) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS;
            if (toMasked == 0) _revert(MintToZeroAddress.selector);
            uint256 end = startTokenId + quantity;
            uint256 tokenId = startTokenId;
            do {
                assembly {
                    // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                    log4(
                        0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                        0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                        _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                        0, // `address(0)`.
                        toMasked, // `to`.
                        tokenId // `tokenId`.
                    )
                }
                // The `!=` check ensures that large values of `quantity`
                // that overflows uint256 will make the loop run out of gas.
            } while (++tokenId != end);
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = end;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * This function is intended for efficient minting only during contract creation.
     *
     * It emits only one {ConsecutiveTransfer} as defined in
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309),
     * instead of a sequence of {Transfer} event(s).
     *
     * Calling this function outside of contract creation WILL make your contract
     * non-compliant with the ERC721 standard.
     * For full ERC721 compliance, substituting ERC721 {Transfer} event(s) with the ERC2309
     * {ConsecutiveTransfer} event is only permissible during contract creation.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {ConsecutiveTransfer} event.
     */
    function _mintERC2309(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
        if (to == address(0)) _revert(MintToZeroAddress.selector);
        if (quantity == 0) _revert(MintZeroQuantity.selector);
        if (quantity > _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT) _revert(MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit.selector);
        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        // Overflows are unrealistic due to the above check for `quantity` to be below the limit.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );
            emit ConsecutiveTransfer(startTokenId, startTokenId + quantity - 1, address(0), to);
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex = startTokenId + quantity;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * See {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _safeMint(
        address to,
        uint256 quantity,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mint(to, quantity);
        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 end = ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex;
                uint256 index = end - quantity;
                do {
                    if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, index++, _data)) {
                        _revert(TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer.selector);
                    }
                } while (index < end);
                // Reentrancy protection.
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex != end) _revert(bytes4(0));
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        _safeMint(to, quantity, "");
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_approve(to, tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _approve(to, tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function _approve(
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bool approvalCheck
    ) internal virtual {
        address owner = ownerOf(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck && _msgSenderERC721A() != owner)
            if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSenderERC721A())) {
                _revert(ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved.selector);
            }
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._tokenApprovals[tokenId].value = to;
        emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                        BURN OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _burn(tokenId, false);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);
        address from = address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked));
        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);
        if (approvalCheck) {
            // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
            if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
                if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) _revert(TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved.selector);
        }
        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }
        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance -= 1`.
            // - `numberBurned += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly decrement the balance, and increment the number burned.
            // This is equivalent to `packed -= 1; packed += 1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED;`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedAddressData[from] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) - 1;
            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the last owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of burning.
            // - `burned` to `true`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                from,
                (_BITMASK_BURNED | _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED) | _nextExtraData(from, address(0), prevOwnershipPacked)
            );
            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != ERC721AStorage.layout()._currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
        emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
        // Overflow not possible, as _burnCounter cannot be exceed _currentIndex times.
        unchecked {
            ERC721AStorage.layout()._burnCounter++;
        }
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                     EXTRA DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Directly sets the extra data for the ownership data `index`.
     */
    function _setExtraDataAt(uint256 index, uint24 extraData) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index];
        if (packed == 0) _revert(OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData.selector);
        uint256 extraDataCasted;
        // Cast `extraData` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            extraDataCasted := extraData
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT) | (extraDataCasted << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        ERC721AStorage.layout()._packedOwnerships[index] = packed;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Called during each token transfer to set the 24bit `extraData` field.
     * Intended to be overridden by the cosumer contract.
     *
     * `previousExtraData` - the value of `extraData` before transfer.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _extraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint24 previousExtraData
    ) internal view virtual returns (uint24) {}
    /**
     * @dev Returns the next extra data for the packed ownership data.
     * The returned result is shifted into position.
     */
    function _nextExtraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint24 extraData = uint24(prevOwnershipPacked >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        return uint256(_extraData(from, to, extraData)) << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                       OTHER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the message sender (defaults to `msg.sender`).
     *
     * If you are writing GSN compatible contracts, you need to override this function.
     */
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a uint256 to its ASCII string decimal representation.
     */
    function _toString(uint256 value) internal pure virtual returns (string memory str) {
        assembly {
            // The maximum value of a uint256 contains 78 digits (1 byte per digit), but
            // we allocate 0xa0 bytes to keep the free memory pointer 32-byte word aligned.
            // We will need 1 word for the trailing zeros padding, 1 word for the length,
            // and 3 words for a maximum of 78 digits. Total: 5 * 0x20 = 0xa0.
            let m := add(mload(0x40), 0xa0)
            // Update the free memory pointer to allocate.
            mstore(0x40, m)
            // Assign the `str` to the end.
            str := sub(m, 0x20)
            // Zeroize the slot after the string.
            mstore(str, 0)
            // Cache the end of the memory to calculate the length later.
            let end := str
            // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
            // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let temp := value } 1 {} {
                str := sub(str, 1)
                // Write the character to the pointer.
                // The ASCII index of the '0' character is 48.
                mstore8(str, add(48, mod(temp, 10)))
                // Keep dividing `temp` until zero.
                temp := div(temp, 10)
                // prettier-ignore
                if iszero(temp) { break }
            }
            let length := sub(end, str)
            // Move the pointer 32 bytes leftwards to make room for the length.
            str := sub(str, 0x20)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(str, length)
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev For more efficient reverts.
     */
    function _revert(bytes4 errorSelector) internal pure {
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, errorSelector)
            revert(0x00, 0x04)
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable diamond facet contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 */
import { ERC721A__InitializableStorage } from "./ERC721A__InitializableStorage.sol";
abstract contract ERC721A__Initializable {
    using ERC721A__InitializableStorage for ERC721A__InitializableStorage.Layout;
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initializer function from being invoked twice.
     */
    modifier initializerERC721A() {
        // If the contract is initializing we ignore whether _initialized is set in order to support multiple
        // inheritance patterns, but we only do this in the context of a constructor, because in other contexts the
        // contract may have been reentered.
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing
                ? _isConstructor()
                : !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized,
            "ERC721A__Initializable: contract is already initialized"
        );
        bool isTopLevelCall = !ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = true;
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initialized = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing = false;
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} modifier, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializingERC721A() {
        require(
            ERC721A__InitializableStorage.layout()._initializing,
            "ERC721A__Initializable: contract is not initializing"
        );
        _;
    }
    /// @dev Returns true if and only if the function is running in the constructor
    function _isConstructor() private view returns (bool) {
        // extcodesize checks the size of the code stored in an address, and
        // address returns the current address. Since the code is still not
        // deployed when running a constructor, any checks on its code size will
        // yield zero, making it an effective way to detect if a contract is
        // under construction or not.
        address self = address(this);
        uint256 cs;
        assembly {
            cs := extcodesize(self)
        }
        return cs == 0;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev This is a base storage for the  initialization function for upgradeable diamond facet contracts
 **/
library ERC721A__InitializableStorage {
    struct Layout {
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
         */
        bool _initialized;
        /*
         * Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
         */
        bool _initializing;
    }
    bytes32 internal constant STORAGE_SLOT = keccak256("ERC721A.contracts.storage.initializable.facet");
    function layout() internal pure returns (Layout storage l) {
        bytes32 slot = STORAGE_SLOT;
        assembly {
            l.slot := slot
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
import "./IERC721AUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721AQueryable.
 */
interface IERC721AQueryableUpgradeable is IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * Invalid query range (`start` >= `stop`).
     */
    error InvalidQueryRange();
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (TokenOwnership memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721A.
 */
interface IERC721AUpgradeable {
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
     */
    error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
    /**
     * Cannot mint to the zero address.
     */
    error MintToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
     */
    error MintZeroQuantity();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    /**
     * The token must be owned by `from`.
     */
    error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
    /**
     * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the
     * ERC721Receiver interface.
     */
    error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
    /**
     * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
     */
    error TransferToZeroAddress();
    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
    /**
     * The `quantity` minted with ERC2309 exceeds the safety limit.
     */
    error MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();
    /**
     * The `extraData` cannot be set on an unintialized ownership slot.
     */
    error OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
    // =============================================================
    //                            STRUCTS
    // =============================================================
    struct TokenOwnership {
        // The address of the owner.
        address addr;
        // Stores the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
        uint64 startTimestamp;
        // Whether the token has been burned.
        bool burned;
        // Arbitrary data similar to `startTimestamp` that can be set via {_extraData}.
        uint24 extraData;
    }
    // =============================================================
    //                         TOKEN COUNTERS
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC721
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables
     * (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);
    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`,
     * checking first that contract recipients are aware of the ERC721 protocol
     * to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move
     * this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom}
     * whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external payable;
    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;
    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);
    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);
    // =============================================================
    //                           IERC2309
    // =============================================================
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when tokens in `fromTokenId` to `toTokenId`
     * (inclusive) is transferred from `from` to `to`, as defined in the
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309) standard.
     *
     * See {_mintERC2309} for more details.
     */
    event ConsecutiveTransfer(uint256 indexed fromTokenId, uint256 toTokenId, address indexed from, address indexed to);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IContractMetadata.sol";
/**
 *  @title   Contract Metadata
 *  @notice  Thirdweb's `ContractMetadata` is a contract extension for any base contracts. It lets you set a metadata URI
 *           for you contract.
 *           Additionally, `ContractMetadata` is necessary for NFT contracts that want royalties to get distributed on OpenSea.
 */
abstract contract ContractMetadata is IContractMetadata {
    /// @notice Returns the contract metadata URI.
    string public override contractURI;
    /**
     *  @notice         Lets a contract admin set the URI for contract-level metadata.
     *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to setup contractURI, e.g. contract admin.
     *                  See {_canSetContractURI}.
     *                  Emits {ContractURIUpdated Event}.
     *
     *  @param _uri     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     */
    function setContractURI(string memory _uri) external override {
        if (!_canSetContractURI()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _setupContractURI(_uri);
    }
    /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the URI for contract-level metadata.
    function _setupContractURI(string memory _uri) internal {
        string memory prevURI = contractURI;
        contractURI = _uri;
        emit ContractURIUpdated(prevURI, _uri);
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether contract metadata can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetContractURI() internal view virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import { OperatorFiltererUpgradeable } from "./OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.sol";
abstract contract DefaultOperatorFiltererUpgradeable is OperatorFiltererUpgradeable {
    address constant DEFAULT_SUBSCRIPTION = address(0x3cc6CddA760b79bAfa08dF41ECFA224f810dCeB6);
    function __DefaultOperatorFilterer_init() internal {
        OperatorFiltererUpgradeable.__OperatorFilterer_init(DEFAULT_SUBSCRIPTION, true);
    }
    function subscribeToRegistry(address _subscription) external {
        require(_canSetOperatorRestriction(), "Not authorized to subscribe to registry.");
        _register(_subscription, true);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IDrop.sol";
import "../lib/MerkleProof.sol";
abstract contract Drop is IDrop {
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            State variables
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev The active conditions for claiming tokens.
    ClaimConditionList public claimCondition;
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            Drop logic
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev Lets an account claim tokens.
    function claim(
        address _receiver,
        uint256 _quantity,
        address _currency,
        uint256 _pricePerToken,
        AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        _beforeClaim(_receiver, _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken, _allowlistProof, _data);
        uint256 activeConditionId = getActiveClaimConditionId();
        verifyClaim(activeConditionId, _dropMsgSender(), _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken, _allowlistProof);
        // Update contract state.
        claimCondition.conditions[activeConditionId].supplyClaimed += _quantity;
        claimCondition.supplyClaimedByWallet[activeConditionId][_dropMsgSender()] += _quantity;
        // If there's a price, collect price.
        _collectPriceOnClaim(address(0), _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken);
        // Mint the relevant tokens to claimer.
        uint256 startTokenId = _transferTokensOnClaim(_receiver, _quantity);
        emit TokensClaimed(activeConditionId, _dropMsgSender(), _receiver, startTokenId, _quantity);
        _afterClaim(_receiver, _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken, _allowlistProof, _data);
    }
    /// @dev Lets a contract admin set claim conditions.
    function setClaimConditions(ClaimCondition[] calldata _conditions, bool _resetClaimEligibility)
        external
        virtual
        override
    {
        if (!_canSetClaimConditions()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        uint256 existingStartIndex = claimCondition.currentStartId;
        uint256 existingPhaseCount = claimCondition.count;
        /**
         *  The mapping `supplyClaimedByWallet` uses a claim condition's UID as a key.
         *
         *  If `_resetClaimEligibility == true`, we assign completely new UIDs to the claim
         *  conditions in `_conditions`, effectively resetting the restrictions on claims expressed
         *  by `supplyClaimedByWallet`.
         */
        uint256 newStartIndex = existingStartIndex;
        if (_resetClaimEligibility) {
            newStartIndex = existingStartIndex + existingPhaseCount;
        }
        claimCondition.count = _conditions.length;
        claimCondition.currentStartId = newStartIndex;
        uint256 lastConditionStartTimestamp;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < _conditions.length; i++) {
            require(i == 0 || lastConditionStartTimestamp < _conditions[i].startTimestamp, "ST");
            uint256 supplyClaimedAlready = claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i].supplyClaimed;
            if (supplyClaimedAlready > _conditions[i].maxClaimableSupply) {
                revert("max supply claimed");
            }
            claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i] = _conditions[i];
            claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i].supplyClaimed = supplyClaimedAlready;
            lastConditionStartTimestamp = _conditions[i].startTimestamp;
        }
        /**
         *  Gas refunds (as much as possible)
         *
         *  If `_resetClaimEligibility == true`, we assign completely new UIDs to the claim
         *  conditions in `_conditions`. So, we delete claim conditions with UID < `newStartIndex`.
         *
         *  If `_resetClaimEligibility == false`, and there are more existing claim conditions
         *  than in `_conditions`, we delete the existing claim conditions that don't get replaced
         *  by the conditions in `_conditions`.
         */
        if (_resetClaimEligibility) {
            for (uint256 i = existingStartIndex; i < newStartIndex; i++) {
                delete claimCondition.conditions[i];
            }
        } else {
            if (existingPhaseCount > _conditions.length) {
                for (uint256 i = _conditions.length; i < existingPhaseCount; i++) {
                    delete claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i];
                }
            }
        }
        emit ClaimConditionsUpdated(_conditions, _resetClaimEligibility);
    }
    /// @dev Checks a request to claim NFTs against the active claim condition's criteria.
    function verifyClaim(
        uint256 _conditionId,
        address _claimer,
        uint256 _quantity,
        address _currency,
        uint256 _pricePerToken,
        AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof
    ) public view returns (bool isOverride) {
        ClaimCondition memory currentClaimPhase = claimCondition.conditions[_conditionId];
        uint256 claimLimit = currentClaimPhase.quantityLimitPerWallet;
        uint256 claimPrice = currentClaimPhase.pricePerToken;
        address claimCurrency = currentClaimPhase.currency;
        if (currentClaimPhase.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
            (isOverride, ) = MerkleProof.verify(
                _allowlistProof.proof,
                currentClaimPhase.merkleRoot,
                keccak256(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        _claimer,
                        _allowlistProof.quantityLimitPerWallet,
                        _allowlistProof.pricePerToken,
                        _allowlistProof.currency
                    )
                )
            );
        }
        if (isOverride) {
            claimLimit = _allowlistProof.quantityLimitPerWallet != 0
                ? _allowlistProof.quantityLimitPerWallet
                : claimLimit;
            claimPrice = _allowlistProof.pricePerToken != type(uint256).max
                ? _allowlistProof.pricePerToken
                : claimPrice;
            claimCurrency = _allowlistProof.pricePerToken != type(uint256).max && _allowlistProof.currency != address(0)
                ? _allowlistProof.currency
                : claimCurrency;
        }
        uint256 supplyClaimedByWallet = claimCondition.supplyClaimedByWallet[_conditionId][_claimer];
        if (_currency != claimCurrency || _pricePerToken != claimPrice) {
            revert("!PriceOrCurrency");
        }
        if (_quantity == 0 || (_quantity + supplyClaimedByWallet > claimLimit)) {
            revert("!Qty");
        }
        if (currentClaimPhase.supplyClaimed + _quantity > currentClaimPhase.maxClaimableSupply) {
            revert("!MaxSupply");
        }
        if (currentClaimPhase.startTimestamp > block.timestamp) {
            revert("cant claim yet");
        }
    }
    /// @dev At any given moment, returns the uid for the active claim condition.
    function getActiveClaimConditionId() public view returns (uint256) {
        for (uint256 i = claimCondition.currentStartId + claimCondition.count; i > claimCondition.currentStartId; i--) {
            if (block.timestamp >= claimCondition.conditions[i - 1].startTimestamp) {
                return i - 1;
            }
        }
        revert("!CONDITION.");
    }
    /// @dev Returns the claim condition at the given uid.
    function getClaimConditionById(uint256 _conditionId) external view returns (ClaimCondition memory condition) {
        condition = claimCondition.conditions[_conditionId];
    }
    /// @dev Returns the supply claimed by claimer for a given conditionId.
    function getSupplyClaimedByWallet(uint256 _conditionId, address _claimer)
        public
        view
        returns (uint256 supplyClaimedByWallet)
    {
        supplyClaimedByWallet = claimCondition.supplyClaimedByWallet[_conditionId][_claimer];
    }
    /*////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
        Optional hooks that can be implemented in the derived contract
    ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev Exposes the ability to override the msg sender.
    function _dropMsgSender() internal virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    /// @dev Runs before every `claim` function call.
    function _beforeClaim(
        address _receiver,
        uint256 _quantity,
        address _currency,
        uint256 _pricePerToken,
        AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {}
    /// @dev Runs after every `claim` function call.
    function _afterClaim(
        address _receiver,
        uint256 _quantity,
        address _currency,
        uint256 _pricePerToken,
        AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {}
    /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
        Virtual functions: to be implemented in derived contract
    //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    /// @dev Collects and distributes the primary sale value of NFTs being claimed.
    function _collectPriceOnClaim(
        address _primarySaleRecipient,
        uint256 _quantityToClaim,
        address _currency,
        uint256 _pricePerToken
    ) internal virtual;
    /// @dev Transfers the NFTs being claimed.
    function _transferTokensOnClaim(address _to, uint256 _quantityBeingClaimed)
        internal
        virtual
        returns (uint256 startTokenId);
    /// @dev Determine what wallet can update claim conditions
    function _canSetClaimConditions() internal view virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "../lib/TWAddress.sol";
import "./interface/IMulticall.sol";
/**
 * @dev Provides a function to batch together multiple calls in a single external call.
 *
 * _Available since v4.1._
 */
contract Multicall is IMulticall {
    /**
     *  @notice Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
     *  @dev Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
     *
     *  @param data The bytes data that makes up the batch of function calls to execute.
     *  @return results The bytes data that makes up the result of the batch of function calls executed.
     */
    function multicall(bytes[] calldata data) external virtual override returns (bytes[] memory results) {
        results = new bytes[](data.length);
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < data.length; i++) {
            results[i] = TWAddress.functionDelegateCall(address(this), data[i]);
        }
        return results;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IOperatorFilterToggle.sol";
abstract contract OperatorFilterToggle is IOperatorFilterToggle {
    bool public operatorRestriction;
    function setOperatorRestriction(bool _restriction) external {
        require(_canSetOperatorRestriction(), "Not authorized to set operator restriction.");
        _setOperatorRestriction(_restriction);
    }
    function _setOperatorRestriction(bool _restriction) internal {
        operatorRestriction = _restriction;
        emit OperatorRestriction(_restriction);
    }
    function _canSetOperatorRestriction() internal virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IOperatorFilterRegistry.sol";
import "./OperatorFilterToggle.sol";
abstract contract OperatorFiltererUpgradeable is OperatorFilterToggle {
    error OperatorNotAllowed(address operator);
    IOperatorFilterRegistry constant OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY =
        IOperatorFilterRegistry(0x000000000000AAeB6D7670E522A718067333cd4E);
    function __OperatorFilterer_init(address subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy, bool subscribe) internal {
        // If an inheriting token contract is deployed to a network without the registry deployed, the modifier
        // will not revert, but the contract will need to be registered with the registry once it is deployed in
        // order for the modifier to filter addresses.
        _register(subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy, subscribe);
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperator(address from) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (operatorRestriction) {
            if (address(OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY).code.length > 0) {
                // Allow spending tokens from addresses with balance
                // Note that this still allows listings and marketplaces with escrow to transfer tokens if transferred
                // from an EOA.
                if (from == msg.sender) {
                    _;
                    return;
                }
                if (!OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), msg.sender)) {
                    revert OperatorNotAllowed(msg.sender);
                }
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    modifier onlyAllowedOperatorApproval(address operator) virtual {
        // Check registry code length to facilitate testing in environments without a deployed registry.
        if (operatorRestriction) {
            if (address(OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY).code.length > 0) {
                if (!OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY.isOperatorAllowed(address(this), operator)) {
                    revert OperatorNotAllowed(operator);
                }
            }
        }
        _;
    }
    function _register(address subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy, bool subscribe) internal {
        // Is the registry deployed?
        if (address(OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY).code.length > 0) {
            // Is the subscription contract deployed?
            if (address(subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy).code.length > 0) {
                // Do we want to subscribe?
                if (subscribe) {
                    OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY.registerAndSubscribe(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                } else {
                    OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY.registerAndCopyEntries(address(this), subscriptionOrRegistrantToCopy);
                }
            } else {
                OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY.register(address(this));
            }
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IOwnable.sol";
/**
 *  @title   Ownable
 *  @notice  Thirdweb's `Ownable` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
 *           who the 'owner' of the inheriting smart contract is, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses
 *           information about who the contract's owner is.
 */
abstract contract Ownable is IOwnable {
    /// @dev Owner of the contract (purpose: OpenSea compatibility)
    address private _owner;
    /// @dev Reverts if caller is not the owner.
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        if (msg.sender != _owner) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice Returns the owner of the contract.
     */
    function owner() public view override returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice Lets an authorized wallet set a new owner for the contract.
     *  @param _newOwner The address to set as the new owner of the contract.
     */
    function setOwner(address _newOwner) external override {
        if (!_canSetOwner()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _setupOwner(_newOwner);
    }
    /// @dev Lets a contract admin set a new owner for the contract. The new owner must be a contract admin.
    function _setupOwner(address _newOwner) internal {
        address _prevOwner = _owner;
        _owner = _newOwner;
        emit OwnerUpdated(_prevOwner, _newOwner);
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether owner can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetOwner() internal view virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IPermissions.sol";
import "../lib/TWStrings.sol";
/**
 *  @title   Permissions
 *  @dev     This contracts provides extending-contracts with role-based access control mechanisms
 */
contract Permissions is IPermissions {
    /// @dev Map from keccak256 hash of a role => a map from address => whether address has role.
    mapping(bytes32 => mapping(address => bool)) private _hasRole;
    /// @dev Map from keccak256 hash of a role to role admin. See {getRoleAdmin}.
    mapping(bytes32 => bytes32) private _getRoleAdmin;
    /// @dev Default admin role for all roles. Only accounts with this role can grant/revoke other roles.
    bytes32 public constant DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE = 0x00;
    /// @dev Modifier that checks if an account has the specified role; reverts otherwise.
    modifier onlyRole(bytes32 role) {
        _checkRole(role, msg.sender);
        _;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Checks whether an account has a particular role.
     *  @dev            Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *  @param account  Address of the account for which the role is being checked.
     */
    function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) public view override returns (bool) {
        return _hasRole[role][account];
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Checks whether an account has a particular role;
     *                  role restrictions can be swtiched on and off.
     *
     *  @dev            Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     *                  Role restrictions can be swtiched on and off:
     *                      - If address(0) has ROLE, then the ROLE restrictions
     *                        don't apply.
     *                      - If address(0) does not have ROLE, then the ROLE
     *                        restrictions will apply.
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *  @param account  Address of the account for which the role is being checked.
     */
    function hasRoleWithSwitch(bytes32 role, address account) public view returns (bool) {
        if (!_hasRole[role][address(0)]) {
            return _hasRole[role][account];
        }
        return true;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Returns the admin role that controls the specified role.
     *  @dev            See {grantRole} and {revokeRole}.
     *                  To change a role's admin, use {_setRoleAdmin}.
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     */
    function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) external view override returns (bytes32) {
        return _getRoleAdmin[role];
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Grants a role to an account, if not previously granted.
     *  @dev            Caller must have admin role for the `role`.
     *                  Emits {RoleGranted Event}.
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *  @param account  Address of the account to which the role is being granted.
     */
    function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
        _checkRole(_getRoleAdmin[role], msg.sender);
        if (_hasRole[role][account]) {
            revert("Can only grant to non holders");
        }
        _setupRole(role, account);
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Revokes role from an account.
     *  @dev            Caller must have admin role for the `role`.
     *                  Emits {RoleRevoked Event}.
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *  @param account  Address of the account from which the role is being revoked.
     */
    function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
        _checkRole(_getRoleAdmin[role], msg.sender);
        _revokeRole(role, account);
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Revokes role from the account.
     *  @dev            Caller must have the `role`, with caller being the same as `account`.
     *                  Emits {RoleRevoked Event}.
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *  @param account  Address of the account from which the role is being revoked.
     */
    function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
        if (msg.sender != account) {
            revert("Can only renounce for self");
        }
        _revokeRole(role, account);
    }
    /// @dev Sets `adminRole` as `role`'s admin role.
    function _setRoleAdmin(bytes32 role, bytes32 adminRole) internal virtual {
        bytes32 previousAdminRole = _getRoleAdmin[role];
        _getRoleAdmin[role] = adminRole;
        emit RoleAdminChanged(role, previousAdminRole, adminRole);
    }
    /// @dev Sets up `role` for `account`
    function _setupRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        _hasRole[role][account] = true;
        emit RoleGranted(role, account, msg.sender);
    }
    /// @dev Revokes `role` from `account`
    function _revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
        _checkRole(role, account);
        delete _hasRole[role][account];
        emit RoleRevoked(role, account, msg.sender);
    }
    /// @dev Checks `role` for `account`. Reverts with a message including the required role.
    function _checkRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal view virtual {
        if (!_hasRole[role][account]) {
            revert(
                string(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        "Permissions: account ",
                        TWStrings.toHexString(uint160(account), 20),
                        " is missing role ",
                        TWStrings.toHexString(uint256(role), 32)
                    )
                )
            );
        }
    }
    /// @dev Checks `role` for `account`. Reverts with a message including the required role.
    function _checkRoleWithSwitch(bytes32 role, address account) internal view virtual {
        if (!hasRoleWithSwitch(role, account)) {
            revert(
                string(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        "Permissions: account ",
                        TWStrings.toHexString(uint160(account), 20),
                        " is missing role ",
                        TWStrings.toHexString(uint256(role), 32)
                    )
                )
            );
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IPermissionsEnumerable.sol";
import "./Permissions.sol";
/**
 *  @title   PermissionsEnumerable
 *  @dev     This contracts provides extending-contracts with role-based access control mechanisms.
 *           Also provides interfaces to view all members with a given role, and total count of members.
 */
contract PermissionsEnumerable is IPermissionsEnumerable, Permissions {
    /**
     *  @notice A data structure to store data of members for a given role.
     *
     *  @param index    Current index in the list of accounts that have a role.
     *  @param members  map from index => address of account that has a role
     *  @param indexOf  map from address => index which the account has.
     */
    struct RoleMembers {
        uint256 index;
        mapping(uint256 => address) members;
        mapping(address => uint256) indexOf;
    }
    /// @dev map from keccak256 hash of a role to its members' data. See {RoleMembers}.
    mapping(bytes32 => RoleMembers) private roleMembers;
    /**
     *  @notice         Returns the role-member from a list of members for a role,
     *                  at a given index.
     *  @dev            Returns `member` who has `role`, at `index` of role-members list.
     *                  See struct {RoleMembers}, and mapping {roleMembers}
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *  @param index    Index in list of current members for the role.
     *
     *  @return member  Address of account that has `role`
     */
    function getRoleMember(bytes32 role, uint256 index) external view override returns (address member) {
        uint256 currentIndex = roleMembers[role].index;
        uint256 check;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < currentIndex; i += 1) {
            if (roleMembers[role].members[i] != address(0)) {
                if (check == index) {
                    member = roleMembers[role].members[i];
                    return member;
                }
                check += 1;
            } else if (hasRole(role, address(0)) && i == roleMembers[role].indexOf[address(0)]) {
                check += 1;
            }
        }
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Returns total number of accounts that have a role.
     *  @dev            Returns `count` of accounts that have `role`.
     *                  See struct {RoleMembers}, and mapping {roleMembers}
     *
     *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
     *
     *  @return count   Total number of accounts that have `role`
     */
    function getRoleMemberCount(bytes32 role) external view override returns (uint256 count) {
        uint256 currentIndex = roleMembers[role].index;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < currentIndex; i += 1) {
            if (roleMembers[role].members[i] != address(0)) {
                count += 1;
            }
        }
        if (hasRole(role, address(0))) {
            count += 1;
        }
    }
    /// @dev Revokes `role` from `account`, and removes `account` from {roleMembers}
    ///      See {_removeMember}
    function _revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal override {
        super._revokeRole(role, account);
        _removeMember(role, account);
    }
    /// @dev Grants `role` to `account`, and adds `account` to {roleMembers}
    ///      See {_addMember}
    function _setupRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal override {
        super._setupRole(role, account);
        _addMember(role, account);
    }
    /// @dev adds `account` to {roleMembers}, for `role`
    function _addMember(bytes32 role, address account) internal {
        uint256 idx = roleMembers[role].index;
        roleMembers[role].index += 1;
        roleMembers[role].members[idx] = account;
        roleMembers[role].indexOf[account] = idx;
    }
    /// @dev removes `account` from {roleMembers}, for `role`
    function _removeMember(bytes32 role, address account) internal {
        uint256 idx = roleMembers[role].indexOf[account];
        delete roleMembers[role].members[idx];
        delete roleMembers[role].indexOf[account];
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IPrimarySale.sol";
/**
 *  @title   Primary Sale
 *  @notice  Thirdweb's `PrimarySale` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
 *           the recipient of primary sales, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses information about
 *           primary sales, if desired.
 */
abstract contract PrimarySale is IPrimarySale {
    /// @dev The address that receives all primary sales value.
    address private recipient;
    /// @dev Returns primary sale recipient address.
    function primarySaleRecipient() public view override returns (address) {
        return recipient;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Updates primary sale recipient.
     *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to set primary sales info.
     *                  See {_canSetPrimarySaleRecipient}.
     *                  Emits {PrimarySaleRecipientUpdated Event}; See {_setupPrimarySaleRecipient}.
     *
     *  @param _saleRecipient   Address to be set as new recipient of primary sales.
     */
    function setPrimarySaleRecipient(address _saleRecipient) external override {
        if (!_canSetPrimarySaleRecipient()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _setupPrimarySaleRecipient(_saleRecipient);
    }
    /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the recipient for all primary sales.
    function _setupPrimarySaleRecipient(address _saleRecipient) internal {
        recipient = _saleRecipient;
        emit PrimarySaleRecipientUpdated(_saleRecipient);
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether primary sale recipient can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetPrimarySaleRecipient() internal view virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./interface/IRoyalty.sol";
/**
 *  @title   Royalty
 *  @notice  Thirdweb's `Royalty` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
 *           the recipient of royalty fee and the royalty fee basis points, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic
 *           that uses information about royalty fees, if desired.
 *
 *  @dev     The `Royalty` contract is ERC2981 compliant.
 */
abstract contract Royalty is IRoyalty {
    /// @dev The (default) address that receives all royalty value.
    address private royaltyRecipient;
    /// @dev The (default) % of a sale to take as royalty (in basis points).
    uint16 private royaltyBps;
    /// @dev Token ID => royalty recipient and bps for token
    mapping(uint256 => RoyaltyInfo) private royaltyInfoForToken;
    /**
     *  @notice   View royalty info for a given token and sale price.
     *  @dev      Returns royalty amount and recipient for `tokenId` and `salePrice`.
     *  @param tokenId          The tokenID of the NFT for which to query royalty info.
     *  @param salePrice        Sale price of the token.
     *
     *  @return receiver        Address of royalty recipient account.
     *  @return royaltyAmount   Royalty amount calculated at current royaltyBps value.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount)
    {
        (address recipient, uint256 bps) = getRoyaltyInfoForToken(tokenId);
        receiver = recipient;
        royaltyAmount = (salePrice * bps) / 10_000;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice          View royalty info for a given token.
     *  @dev             Returns royalty recipient and bps for `_tokenId`.
     *  @param _tokenId  The tokenID of the NFT for which to query royalty info.
     */
    function getRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 _tokenId) public view override returns (address, uint16) {
        RoyaltyInfo memory royaltyForToken = royaltyInfoForToken[_tokenId];
        return
            royaltyForToken.recipient == address(0)
                ? (royaltyRecipient, uint16(royaltyBps))
                : (royaltyForToken.recipient, uint16(royaltyForToken.bps));
    }
    /**
     *  @notice Returns the defualt royalty recipient and BPS for this contract's NFTs.
     */
    function getDefaultRoyaltyInfo() external view override returns (address, uint16) {
        return (royaltyRecipient, uint16(royaltyBps));
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Updates default royalty recipient and bps.
     *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to set royalty info.
     *                  See {_canSetRoyaltyInfo}.
     *                  Emits {DefaultRoyalty Event}; See {_setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo}.
     *
     *  @param _royaltyRecipient   Address to be set as default royalty recipient.
     *  @param _royaltyBps         Updated royalty bps.
     */
    function setDefaultRoyaltyInfo(address _royaltyRecipient, uint256 _royaltyBps) external override {
        if (!_canSetRoyaltyInfo()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo(_royaltyRecipient, _royaltyBps);
    }
    /// @dev Lets a contract admin update the default royalty recipient and bps.
    function _setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo(address _royaltyRecipient, uint256 _royaltyBps) internal {
        if (_royaltyBps > 10_000) {
            revert("Exceeds max bps");
        }
        royaltyRecipient = _royaltyRecipient;
        royaltyBps = uint16(_royaltyBps);
        emit DefaultRoyalty(_royaltyRecipient, _royaltyBps);
    }
    /**
     *  @notice         Updates default royalty recipient and bps for a particular token.
     *  @dev            Sets royalty info for `_tokenId`. Caller should be authorized to set royalty info.
     *                  See {_canSetRoyaltyInfo}.
     *                  Emits {RoyaltyForToken Event}; See {_setupRoyaltyInfoForToken}.
     *
     *  @param _recipient   Address to be set as royalty recipient for given token Id.
     *  @param _bps         Updated royalty bps for the token Id.
     */
    function setRoyaltyInfoForToken(
        uint256 _tokenId,
        address _recipient,
        uint256 _bps
    ) external override {
        if (!_canSetRoyaltyInfo()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _setupRoyaltyInfoForToken(_tokenId, _recipient, _bps);
    }
    /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the royalty recipient and bps for a particular token Id.
    function _setupRoyaltyInfoForToken(
        uint256 _tokenId,
        address _recipient,
        uint256 _bps
    ) internal {
        if (_bps > 10_000) {
            revert("Exceeds max bps");
        }
        royaltyInfoForToken[_tokenId] = RoyaltyInfo({ recipient: _recipient, bps: _bps });
        emit RoyaltyForToken(_tokenId, _recipient, _bps);
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether royalty info can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetRoyaltyInfo() internal view virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;
/// @author thirdweb
import "../lib/NFTMetadataRendererLib.sol";
import "./interface/ISharedMetadata.sol";
import "../eip/interface/IERC4906.sol";
abstract contract SharedMetadata is ISharedMetadata, IERC4906 {
    /// @notice Token metadata information
    SharedMetadataInfo public sharedMetadata;
    /// @notice Set shared metadata for NFTs
    function setSharedMetadata(SharedMetadataInfo calldata _metadata) external virtual {
        if (!_canSetSharedMetadata()) {
            revert("Not authorized");
        }
        _setSharedMetadata(_metadata);
    }
    /**
     *  @dev Sets shared metadata for NFTs.
     *  @param _metadata common metadata for all tokens
     */
    function _setSharedMetadata(SharedMetadataInfo calldata _metadata) internal {
        sharedMetadata = SharedMetadataInfo({
            name: _metadata.name,
            description: _metadata.description,
            imageURI: _metadata.imageURI,
            animationURI: _metadata.animationURI
        });
        emit BatchMetadataUpdate(0, type(uint256).max);
        emit SharedMetadataUpdated({
            name: _metadata.name,
            description: _metadata.description,
            imageURI: _metadata.imageURI,
            animationURI: _metadata.animationURI
        });
    }
    /**
     *  @dev Token URI information getter
     *  @param tokenId Token ID to get URI for
     */
    function _getURIFromSharedMetadata(uint256 tokenId) internal view returns (string memory) {
        SharedMetadataInfo memory info = sharedMetadata;
        return
            NFTMetadataRenderer.createMetadataEdition({
                name: info.name,
                description: info.description,
                imageURI: info.imageURI,
                animationURI: info.animationURI,
                tokenOfEdition: tokenId
            });
    }
    /// @dev Returns whether shared metadata can be set in the given execution context.
    function _canSetSharedMetadata() internal view virtual returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 *  The interface `IClaimCondition` is written for thirdweb's 'Drop' contracts, which are distribution mechanisms for tokens.
 *
 *  A claim condition defines criteria under which accounts can mint tokens. Claim conditions can be overwritten
 *  or added to by the contract admin. At any moment, there is only one active claim condition.
 */
interface IClaimCondition {
    /**
     *  @notice The criteria that make up a claim condition.
     *
     *  @param startTimestamp                 The unix timestamp after which the claim condition applies.
     *                                        The same claim condition applies until the `startTimestamp`
     *                                        of the next claim condition.
     *
     *  @param maxClaimableSupply             The maximum total number of tokens that can be claimed under
     *                                        the claim condition.
     *
     *  @param supplyClaimed                  At any given point, the number of tokens that have been claimed
     *                                        under the claim condition.
     *
     *  @param quantityLimitPerWallet         The maximum number of tokens that can be claimed by a wallet.
     *
     *  @param merkleRoot                     The allowlist of addresses that can claim tokens under the claim
     *                                        condition.
     *
     *  @param pricePerToken                  The price required to pay per token claimed.
     *
     *  @param currency                       The currency in which the `pricePerToken` must be paid.
     *
     *  @param metadata                       Claim condition metadata.
     */
    struct ClaimCondition {
        uint256 startTimestamp;
        uint256 maxClaimableSupply;
        uint256 supplyClaimed;
        uint256 quantityLimitPerWallet;
        bytes32 merkleRoot;
        uint256 pricePerToken;
        address currency;
        string metadata;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./IClaimCondition.sol";
/**
 *  The interface `IClaimConditionMultiPhase` is written for thirdweb's 'Drop' contracts, which are distribution mechanisms for tokens.
 *
 *  An authorized wallet can set a series of claim conditions, ordered by their respective `startTimestamp`.
 *  A claim condition defines criteria under which accounts can mint tokens. Claim conditions can be overwritten
 *  or added to by the contract admin. At any moment, there is only one active claim condition.
 */
interface IClaimConditionMultiPhase is IClaimCondition {
    /**
     *  @notice The set of all claim conditions, at any given moment.
     *  Claim Phase ID = [currentStartId, currentStartId + length - 1];
     *
     *  @param currentStartId           The uid for the first claim condition amongst the current set of
     *                                  claim conditions. The uid for each next claim condition is one
     *                                  more than the previous claim condition's uid.
     *
     *  @param count                    The total number of phases / claim conditions in the list
     *                                  of claim conditions.
     *
     *  @param conditions                   The claim conditions at a given uid. Claim conditions
     *                                  are ordered in an ascending order by their `startTimestamp`.
     *
     *  @param supplyClaimedByWallet    Map from a claim condition uid and account to supply claimed by account.
     */
    struct ClaimConditionList {
        uint256 currentStartId;
        uint256 count;
        mapping(uint256 => ClaimCondition) conditions;
        mapping(uint256 => mapping(address => uint256)) supplyClaimedByWallet;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 *  Thirdweb's `ContractMetadata` is a contract extension for any base contracts. It lets you set a metadata URI
 *  for you contract.
 *
 *  Additionally, `ContractMetadata` is necessary for NFT contracts that want royalties to get distributed on OpenSea.
 */
interface IContractMetadata {
    /// @dev Returns the metadata URI of the contract.
    function contractURI() external view returns (string memory);
    /**
     *  @dev Sets contract URI for the storefront-level metadata of the contract.
     *       Only module admin can call this function.
     */
    function setContractURI(string calldata _uri) external;
    /// @dev Emitted when the contract URI is updated.
    event ContractURIUpdated(string prevURI, string newURI);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./IClaimConditionMultiPhase.sol";
/**
 *  The interface `IDrop` is written for thirdweb's 'Drop' contracts, which are distribution mechanisms for tokens.
 *
 *  An authorized wallet can set a series of claim conditions, ordered by their respective `startTimestamp`.
 *  A claim condition defines criteria under which accounts can mint tokens. Claim conditions can be overwritten
 *  or added to by the contract admin. At any moment, there is only one active claim condition.
 */
interface IDrop is IClaimConditionMultiPhase {
    /**
     *  @param proof Prood of concerned wallet's inclusion in an allowlist.
     *  @param quantityLimitPerWallet The total quantity of tokens the allowlisted wallet is eligible to claim over time.
     *  @param pricePerToken The price per token the allowlisted wallet must pay to claim tokens.
     *  @param currency The currency in which the allowlisted wallet must pay the price for claiming tokens.
     */
    struct AllowlistProof {
        bytes32[] proof;
        uint256 quantityLimitPerWallet;
        uint256 pricePerToken;
        address currency;
    }
    /// @notice Emitted when tokens are claimed via `claim`.
    event TokensClaimed(
        uint256 indexed claimConditionIndex,
        address indexed claimer,
        address indexed receiver,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantityClaimed
    );
    /// @notice Emitted when the contract's claim conditions are updated.
    event ClaimConditionsUpdated(ClaimCondition[] claimConditions, bool resetEligibility);
    /**
     *  @notice Lets an account claim a given quantity of NFTs.
     *
     *  @param receiver                       The receiver of the NFTs to claim.
     *  @param quantity                       The quantity of NFTs to claim.
     *  @param currency                       The currency in which to pay for the claim.
     *  @param pricePerToken                  The price per token to pay for the claim.
     *  @param allowlistProof                 The proof of the claimer's inclusion in the merkle root allowlist
     *                                        of the claim conditions that apply.
     *  @param data                           Arbitrary bytes data that can be leveraged in the implementation of this interface.
     */
    function claim(
        address receiver,
        uint256 quantity,
        address currency,
        uint256 pricePerToken,
        AllowlistProof calldata allowlistProof,
        bytes memory data
    ) external payable;
    /**
     *  @notice Lets a contract admin (account with `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE`) set claim conditions.
     *
     *  @param phases                   Claim conditions in ascending order by `startTimestamp`.
     *
     *  @param resetClaimEligibility    Whether to honor the restrictions applied to wallets who have claimed tokens in the current conditions,
     *                                  in the new claim conditions being set.
     *
     */
    function setClaimConditions(ClaimCondition[] calldata phases, bool resetClaimEligibility) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 * @dev Provides a function to batch together multiple calls in a single external call.
 *
 * _Available since v4.1._
 */
interface IMulticall {
    /**
     * @dev Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
     */
    function multicall(bytes[] calldata data) external returns (bytes[] memory results);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
interface IOperatorFilterRegistry {
    function isOperatorAllowed(address registrant, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    function register(address registrant) external;
    function registerAndSubscribe(address registrant, address subscription) external;
    function registerAndCopyEntries(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function unregister(address addr) external;
    function updateOperator(
        address registrant,
        address operator,
        bool filtered
    ) external;
    function updateOperators(
        address registrant,
        address[] calldata operators,
        bool filtered
    ) external;
    function updateCodeHash(
        address registrant,
        bytes32 codehash,
        bool filtered
    ) external;
    function updateCodeHashes(
        address registrant,
        bytes32[] calldata codeHashes,
        bool filtered
    ) external;
    function subscribe(address registrant, address registrantToSubscribe) external;
    function unsubscribe(address registrant, bool copyExistingEntries) external;
    function subscriptionOf(address addr) external returns (address registrant);
    function subscribers(address registrant) external returns (address[] memory);
    function subscriberAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function copyEntriesOf(address registrant, address registrantToCopy) external;
    function isOperatorFiltered(address registrant, address operator) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashOfFiltered(address registrant, address operatorWithCode) external returns (bool);
    function isCodeHashFiltered(address registrant, bytes32 codeHash) external returns (bool);
    function filteredOperators(address addr) external returns (address[] memory);
    function filteredCodeHashes(address addr) external returns (bytes32[] memory);
    function filteredOperatorAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (address);
    function filteredCodeHashAt(address registrant, uint256 index) external returns (bytes32);
    function isRegistered(address addr) external returns (bool);
    function codeHashOf(address addr) external returns (bytes32);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
interface IOperatorFilterToggle {
    event OperatorRestriction(bool restriction);
    function operatorRestriction() external view returns (bool);
    function setOperatorRestriction(bool restriction) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 *  Thirdweb's `Ownable` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
 *  who the 'owner' of the inheriting smart contract is, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses
 *  information about who the contract's owner is.
 */
interface IOwnable {
    /// @dev Returns the owner of the contract.
    function owner() external view returns (address);
    /// @dev Lets a module admin set a new owner for the contract. The new owner must be a module admin.
    function setOwner(address _newOwner) external;
    /// @dev Emitted when a new Owner is set.
    event OwnerUpdated(address indexed prevOwner, address indexed newOwner);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 * @dev External interface of AccessControl declared to support ERC165 detection.
 */
interface IPermissions {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `newAdminRole` is set as ``role``'s admin role, replacing `previousAdminRole`
     *
     * `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE` is the starting admin for all roles, despite
     * {RoleAdminChanged} not being emitted signaling this.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    event RoleAdminChanged(bytes32 indexed role, bytes32 indexed previousAdminRole, bytes32 indexed newAdminRole);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` is granted `role`.
     *
     * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call, an admin role
     * bearer except when using {AccessControl-_setupRole}.
     */
    event RoleGranted(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `account` is revoked `role`.
     *
     * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call:
     *   - if using `revokeRole`, it is the admin role bearer
     *   - if using `renounceRole`, it is the role bearer (i.e. `account`)
     */
    event RoleRevoked(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);
    /**
     * @dev Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
     */
    function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) external view returns (bool);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the admin role that controls `role`. See {grantRole} and
     * {revokeRole}.
     *
     * To change a role's admin, use {AccessControl-_setRoleAdmin}.
     */
    function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) external view returns (bytes32);
    /**
     * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     */
    function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
     *
     * If `account` had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
     */
    function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    /**
     * @dev Revokes `role` from the calling account.
     *
     * Roles are often managed via {grantRole} and {revokeRole}: this function's
     * purpose is to provide a mechanism for accounts to lose their privileges
     * if they are compromised (such as when a trusted device is misplaced).
     *
     * If the calling account had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked}
     * event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the caller must be `account`.
     */
    function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "./IPermissions.sol";
/**
 * @dev External interface of AccessControlEnumerable declared to support ERC165 detection.
 */
interface IPermissionsEnumerable is IPermissions {
    /**
     * @dev Returns one of the accounts that have `role`. `index` must be a
     * value between 0 and {getRoleMemberCount}, non-inclusive.
     *
     * Role bearers are not sorted in any particular way, and their ordering may
     * change at any point.
     *
     * WARNING: When using {getRoleMember} and {getRoleMemberCount}, make sure
     * you perform all queries on the same block. See the following
     * [forum post](https://forum.openzeppelin.com/t/iterating-over-elements-on-enumerableset-in-openzeppelin-contracts/2296)
     * for more information.
     */
    function getRoleMember(bytes32 role, uint256 index) external view returns (address);
    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of accounts that have `role`. Can be used
     * together with {getRoleMember} to enumerate all bearers of a role.
     */
    function getRoleMemberCount(bytes32 role) external view returns (uint256);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 *  Thirdweb's `Primary` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
 *  the recipient of primary sales, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses information about
 *  primary sales, if desired.
 */
interface IPrimarySale {
    /// @dev The adress that receives all primary sales value.
    function primarySaleRecipient() external view returns (address);
    /// @dev Lets a module admin set the default recipient of all primary sales.
    function setPrimarySaleRecipient(address _saleRecipient) external;
    /// @dev Emitted when a new sale recipient is set.
    event PrimarySaleRecipientUpdated(address indexed recipient);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
import "../../eip/interface/IERC2981.sol";
/**
 *  Thirdweb's `Royalty` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
 *  the recipient of royalty fee and the royalty fee basis points, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic
 *  that uses information about royalty fees, if desired.
 *
 *  The `Royalty` contract is ERC2981 compliant.
 */
interface IRoyalty is IERC2981 {
    struct RoyaltyInfo {
        address recipient;
        uint256 bps;
    }
    /// @dev Returns the royalty recipient and fee bps.
    function getDefaultRoyaltyInfo() external view returns (address, uint16);
    /// @dev Lets a module admin update the royalty bps and recipient.
    function setDefaultRoyaltyInfo(address _royaltyRecipient, uint256 _royaltyBps) external;
    /// @dev Lets a module admin set the royalty recipient for a particular token Id.
    function setRoyaltyInfoForToken(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address recipient,
        uint256 bps
    ) external;
    /// @dev Returns the royalty recipient for a particular token Id.
    function getRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address, uint16);
    /// @dev Emitted when royalty info is updated.
    event DefaultRoyalty(address indexed newRoyaltyRecipient, uint256 newRoyaltyBps);
    /// @dev Emitted when royalty recipient for tokenId is set
    event RoyaltyForToken(uint256 indexed tokenId, address indexed royaltyRecipient, uint256 royaltyBps);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;
/// @author thirdweb
interface ISharedMetadata {
    /// @notice Emitted when shared metadata is lazy minted.
    event SharedMetadataUpdated(string name, string description, string imageURI, string animationURI);
    /**
     *  @notice Structure for metadata shared across all tokens
     *
     *  @param name Shared name of NFT in metadata
     *  @param description Shared description of NFT in metadata
     *  @param imageURI Shared URI of image to render for NFTs
     *  @param animationURI Shared URI of animation to render for NFTs
     */
    struct SharedMetadataInfo {
        string name;
        string description;
        string imageURI;
        string animationURI;
    }
    /**
     *  @notice Set shared metadata for NFTs
     *  @param _metadata common metadata for all tokens
     */
    function setSharedMetadata(SharedMetadataInfo calldata _metadata) external;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
interface IWETH {
    function deposit() external payable;
    function withdraw(uint256 amount) external;
    function transfer(address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
// Helper interfaces
import { IWETH } from "../interfaces/IWETH.sol";
import "../openzeppelin-presets/token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol";
library CurrencyTransferLib {
    using SafeERC20 for IERC20;
    /// @dev The address interpreted as native token of the chain.
    address public constant NATIVE_TOKEN = 0xEeeeeEeeeEeEeeEeEeEeeEEEeeeeEeeeeeeeEEeE;
    /// @dev Transfers a given amount of currency.
    function transferCurrency(
        address _currency,
        address _from,
        address _to,
        uint256 _amount
    ) internal {
        if (_amount == 0) {
            return;
        }
        if (_currency == NATIVE_TOKEN) {
            safeTransferNativeToken(_to, _amount);
        } else {
            safeTransferERC20(_currency, _from, _to, _amount);
        }
    }
    /// @dev Transfers a given amount of currency. (With native token wrapping)
    function transferCurrencyWithWrapper(
        address _currency,
        address _from,
        address _to,
        uint256 _amount,
        address _nativeTokenWrapper
    ) internal {
        if (_amount == 0) {
            return;
        }
        if (_currency == NATIVE_TOKEN) {
            if (_from == address(this)) {
                // withdraw from weth then transfer withdrawn native token to recipient
                IWETH(_nativeTokenWrapper).withdraw(_amount);
                safeTransferNativeTokenWithWrapper(_to, _amount, _nativeTokenWrapper);
            } else if (_to == address(this)) {
                // store native currency in weth
                require(_amount == msg.value, "msg.value != amount");
                IWETH(_nativeTokenWrapper).deposit{ value: _amount }();
            } else {
                safeTransferNativeTokenWithWrapper(_to, _amount, _nativeTokenWrapper);
            }
        } else {
            safeTransferERC20(_currency, _from, _to, _amount);
        }
    }
    /// @dev Transfer `amount` of ERC20 token from `from` to `to`.
    function safeTransferERC20(
        address _currency,
        address _from,
        address _to,
        uint256 _amount
    ) internal {
        if (_from == _to) {
            return;
        }
        if (_from == address(this)) {
            IERC20(_currency).safeTransfer(_to, _amount);
        } else {
            IERC20(_currency).safeTransferFrom(_from, _to, _amount);
        }
    }
    /// @dev Transfers `amount` of native token to `to`.
    function safeTransferNativeToken(address to, uint256 value) internal {
        // solhint-disable avoid-low-level-calls
        // slither-disable-next-line low-level-calls
        (bool success, ) = to.call{ value: value }("");
        require(success, "native token transfer failed");
    }
    /// @dev Transfers `amount` of native token to `to`. (With native token wrapping)
    function safeTransferNativeTokenWithWrapper(
        address to,
        uint256 value,
        address _nativeTokenWrapper
    ) internal {
        // solhint-disable avoid-low-level-calls
        // slither-disable-next-line low-level-calls
        (bool success, ) = to.call{ value: value }("");
        if (!success) {
            IWETH(_nativeTokenWrapper).deposit{ value: value }();
            IERC20(_nativeTokenWrapper).safeTransfer(to, value);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 * @dev These functions deal with verification of Merkle Trees proofs.
 *
 * The proofs can be generated using the JavaScript library
 * https://github.com/miguelmota/merkletreejs[merkletreejs].
 * Note: the hashing algorithm should be keccak256 and pair sorting should be enabled.
 *
 * See `test/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.test.js` for some examples.
 *
 * Source: https://github.com/ensdomains/governance/blob/master/contracts/MerkleProof.sol
 */
library MerkleProof {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if a `leaf` can be proved to be a part of a Merkle tree
     * defined by `root`. For this, a `proof` must be provided, containing
     * sibling hashes on the branch from the leaf to the root of the tree. Each
     * pair of leaves and each pair of pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function verify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32 leaf
    ) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        uint256 index = 0;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            index *= 2;
            bytes32 proofElement = proof[i];
            if (computedHash <= proofElement) {
                // Hash(current computed hash + current element of the proof)
                computedHash = keccak256(abi.encodePacked(computedHash, proofElement));
            } else {
                // Hash(current element of the proof + current computed hash)
                computedHash = keccak256(abi.encodePacked(proofElement, computedHash));
                index += 1;
            }
        }
        // Check if the computed hash (root) is equal to the provided root
        return (computedHash == root, index);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.10;
/* solhint-disable quotes */
/// @author thirdweb
/// credits: Zora
import "./TWStrings.sol";
import "../openzeppelin-presets/utils/Base64.sol";
/// NFT metadata library for rendering metadata associated with editions
library NFTMetadataRenderer {
    /**
     *  @notice Generate edition metadata from storage information as base64-json blob
     *  @dev Combines the media data and metadata
     * @param name Name of NFT in metadata
     * @param description Description of NFT in metadata
     * @param imageURI URI of image to render for edition
     * @param animationURI URI of animation to render for edition
     * @param tokenOfEdition Token ID for specific token
     */
    function createMetadataEdition(
        string memory name,
        string memory description,
        string memory imageURI,
        string memory animationURI,
        uint256 tokenOfEdition
    ) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        string memory _tokenMediaData = tokenMediaData(imageURI, animationURI);
        bytes memory json = createMetadataJSON(name, description, _tokenMediaData, tokenOfEdition);
        return encodeMetadataJSON(json);
    }
    /**
     * @param name Name of NFT in metadata
     * @param description Description of NFT in metadata
     * @param mediaData Data for media to include in json object
     * @param tokenOfEdition Token ID for specific token
     */
    function createMetadataJSON(
        string memory name,
        string memory description,
        string memory mediaData,
        uint256 tokenOfEdition
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        return
            abi.encodePacked(
                '{"name": "',
                name,
                " ",
                TWStrings.toString(tokenOfEdition),
                '", "',
                'description": "',
                description,
                '", "',
                mediaData,
                'properties": {"number": ',
                TWStrings.toString(tokenOfEdition),
                ', "name": "',
                name,
                '"}}'
            );
    }
    /// Encodes the argument json bytes into base64-data uri format
    /// @param json Raw json to base64 and turn into a data-uri
    function encodeMetadataJSON(bytes memory json) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        return string(abi.encodePacked("data:application/json;base64,", Base64.encode(json)));
    }
    /// Generates edition metadata from storage information as base64-json blob
    /// Combines the media data and metadata
    /// @param imageUrl URL of image to render for edition
    /// @param animationUrl URL of animation to render for edition
    function tokenMediaData(string memory imageUrl, string memory animationUrl) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        bool hasImage = bytes(imageUrl).length > 0;
        bool hasAnimation = bytes(animationUrl).length > 0;
        if (hasImage && hasAnimation) {
            return string(abi.encodePacked('image": "', imageUrl, '", "animation_url": "', animationUrl, '", "'));
        }
        if (hasImage) {
            return string(abi.encodePacked('image": "', imageUrl, '", "'));
        }
        if (hasAnimation) {
            return string(abi.encodePacked('animation_url": "', animationUrl, '", "'));
        }
        return "";
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library TWAddress {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.
        return account.code.length > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * [EIP1884](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884) increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{ value: amount }("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCall(target, data, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{ value: value }(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        require(isContract(target), "Address: static call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a delegate call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.4._
     */
    function functionDelegateCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionDelegateCall(target, data, "Address: low-level delegate call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a delegate call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.4._
     */
    function functionDelegateCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(isContract(target), "Address: delegate call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.delegatecall(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verifies that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
            if (returndata.length > 0) {
                // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
                assembly {
                    let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                    revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
                }
            } else {
                revert(errorMessage);
            }
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/// @author thirdweb
/**
 * @dev String operations.
 */
library TWStrings {
    bytes16 private constant _HEX_SYMBOLS = "0123456789abcdef";
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
     */
    function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        // Inspired by OraclizeAPI's implementation - MIT licence
        // https://github.com/oraclize/ethereum-api/blob/b42146b063c7d6ee1358846c198246239e9360e8/oraclizeAPI_0.4.25.sol
        if (value == 0) {
            return "0";
        }
        uint256 temp = value;
        uint256 digits;
        while (temp != 0) {
            digits++;
            temp /= 10;
        }
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(digits);
        while (value != 0) {
            digits -= 1;
            buffer[digits] = bytes1(uint8(48 + uint256(value % 10)));
            value /= 10;
        }
        return string(buffer);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        if (value == 0) {
            return "0x00";
        }
        uint256 temp = value;
        uint256 length = 0;
        while (temp != 0) {
            length++;
            temp >>= 8;
        }
        return toHexString(value, length);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
        buffer[0] = "0";
        buffer[1] = "x";
        for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
            buffer[i] = _HEX_SYMBOLS[value & 0xf];
            value >>= 4;
        }
        require(value == 0, "Strings: hex length insufficient");
        return string(buffer);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.0 (metatx/ERC2771Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.11;
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Context variant with ERC2771 support.
 */
abstract contract ERC2771ContextUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
    mapping(address => bool) private _trustedForwarder;
    function __ERC2771Context_init(address[] memory trustedForwarder) internal onlyInitializing {
        __Context_init_unchained();
        __ERC2771Context_init_unchained(trustedForwarder);
    }
    function __ERC2771Context_init_unchained(address[] memory trustedForwarder) internal onlyInitializing {
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < trustedForwarder.length; i++) {
            _trustedForwarder[trustedForwarder[i]] = true;
        }
    }
    function isTrustedForwarder(address forwarder) public view virtual returns (bool) {
        return _trustedForwarder[forwarder];
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual override returns (address sender) {
        if (isTrustedForwarder(msg.sender)) {
            // The assembly code is more direct than the Solidity version using `abi.decode`.
            assembly {
                sender := shr(96, calldataload(sub(calldatasize(), 20)))
            }
        } else {
            return super._msgSender();
        }
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual override returns (bytes calldata) {
        if (isTrustedForwarder(msg.sender)) {
            return msg.data[:msg.data.length - 20];
        } else {
            return super._msgData();
        }
    }
    uint256[49] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../../../../eip/interface/IERC20.sol";
import "../../../../lib/TWAddress.sol";
/**
 * @title SafeERC20
 * @dev Wrappers around ERC20 operations that throw on failure (when the token
 * contract returns false). Tokens that return no value (and instead revert or
 * throw on failure) are also supported, non-reverting calls are assumed to be
 * successful.
 * To use this library you can add a `using SafeERC20 for IERC20;` statement to your contract,
 * which allows you to call the safe operations as `token.safeTransfer(...)`, etc.
 */
library SafeERC20 {
    using TWAddress for address;
    function safeTransfer(
        IERC20 token,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transfer.selector, to, value));
    }
    function safeTransferFrom(
        IERC20 token,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transferFrom.selector, from, to, value));
    }
    /**
     * @dev Deprecated. This function has issues similar to the ones found in
     * {IERC20-approve}, and its usage is discouraged.
     *
     * Whenever possible, use {safeIncreaseAllowance} and
     * {safeDecreaseAllowance} instead.
     */
    function safeApprove(
        IERC20 token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        // safeApprove should only be called when setting an initial allowance,
        // or when resetting it to zero. To increase and decrease it, use
        // 'safeIncreaseAllowance' and 'safeDecreaseAllowance'
        require(
            (value == 0) || (token.allowance(address(this), spender) == 0),
            "SafeERC20: approve from non-zero to non-zero allowance"
        );
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, value));
    }
    function safeIncreaseAllowance(
        IERC20 token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        uint256 newAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender) + value;
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
    }
    function safeDecreaseAllowance(
        IERC20 token,
        address spender,
        uint256 value
    ) internal {
        unchecked {
            uint256 oldAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
            require(oldAllowance >= value, "SafeERC20: decreased allowance below zero");
            uint256 newAllowance = oldAllowance - value;
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
     * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
     * @param token The token targeted by the call.
     * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
     */
    function _callOptionalReturn(IERC20 token, bytes memory data) private {
        // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
        // we're implementing it ourselves. We use {Address.functionCall} to perform this call, which verifies that
        // the target address contains contract code and also asserts for success in the low-level call.
        bytes memory returndata = address(token).functionCall(data, "SafeERC20: low-level call failed");
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // Return data is optional
            require(abi.decode(returndata, (bool)), "SafeERC20: ERC20 operation did not succeed");
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (utils/Base64.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Provides a set of functions to operate with Base64 strings.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
library Base64 {
    /**
     * @dev Base64 Encoding/Decoding Table
     */
    string internal constant _TABLE = "ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789+/";
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `bytes` to its Bytes64 `string` representation.
     */
    function encode(bytes memory data) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        /**
         * Inspired by Brecht Devos (Brechtpd) implementation - MIT licence
         * https://github.com/Brechtpd/base64/blob/e78d9fd951e7b0977ddca77d92dc85183770daf4/base64.sol
         */
        if (data.length == 0) return "";
        // Loads the table into memory
        string memory table = _TABLE;
        // Encoding takes 3 bytes chunks of binary data from `bytes` data parameter
        // and split into 4 numbers of 6 bits.
        // The final Base64 length should be `bytes` data length multiplied by 4/3 rounded up
        // - `data.length + 2`  -> Round up
        // - `/ 3`              -> Number of 3-bytes chunks
        // - `4 *`              -> 4 characters for each chunk
        string memory result = new string(4 * ((data.length + 2) / 3));
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            // Prepare the lookup table (skip the first "length" byte)
            let tablePtr := add(table, 1)
            // Prepare result pointer, jump over length
            let resultPtr := add(result, 32)
            // Run over the input, 3 bytes at a time
            for {
                let dataPtr := data
                let endPtr := add(data, mload(data))
            } lt(dataPtr, endPtr) {
            } {
                // Advance 3 bytes
                dataPtr := add(dataPtr, 3)
                let input := mload(dataPtr)
                // To write each character, shift the 3 bytes (18 bits) chunk
                // 4 times in blocks of 6 bits for each character (18, 12, 6, 0)
                // and apply logical AND with 0x3F which is the number of
                // the previous character in the ASCII table prior to the Base64 Table
                // The result is then added to the table to get the character to write,
                // and finally write it in the result pointer but with a left shift
                // of 256 (1 byte) - 8 (1 ASCII char) = 248 bits
                mstore8(resultPtr, mload(add(tablePtr, and(shr(18, input), 0x3F))))
                resultPtr := add(resultPtr, 1) // Advance
                mstore8(resultPtr, mload(add(tablePtr, and(shr(12, input), 0x3F))))
                resultPtr := add(resultPtr, 1) // Advance
                mstore8(resultPtr, mload(add(tablePtr, and(shr(6, input), 0x3F))))
                resultPtr := add(resultPtr, 1) // Advance
                mstore8(resultPtr, mload(add(tablePtr, and(input, 0x3F))))
                resultPtr := add(resultPtr, 1) // Advance
            }
            // When data `bytes` is not exactly 3 bytes long
            // it is padded with `=` characters at the end
            switch mod(mload(data), 3)
            case 1 {
                mstore8(sub(resultPtr, 1), 0x3d)
                mstore8(sub(resultPtr, 2), 0x3d)
            }
            case 2 {
                mstore8(sub(resultPtr, 1), 0x3d)
            }
        }
        return result;
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 *
 * _Available since v4.5._
 */
interface IERC2981Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice)
        external
        view
        returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (proxy/utils/Initializable.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.2;
import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
/**
 * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
 * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
 * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
 * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
 *
 * The initialization functions use a version number. Once a version number is used, it is consumed and cannot be
 * reused. This mechanism prevents re-execution of each "step" but allows the creation of new initialization steps in
 * case an upgrade adds a module that needs to be initialized.
 *
 * For example:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * contract MyToken is ERC20Upgradeable {
 *     function initialize() initializer public {
 *         __ERC20_init("MyToken", "MTK");
 *     }
 * }
 * contract MyTokenV2 is MyToken, ERC20PermitUpgradeable {
 *     function initializeV2() reinitializer(2) public {
 *         __ERC20Permit_init("MyToken");
 *     }
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
 * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
 *
 * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
 * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
 *
 * [CAUTION]
 * ====
 * Avoid leaving a contract uninitialized.
 *
 * An uninitialized contract can be taken over by an attacker. This applies to both a proxy and its implementation
 * contract, which may impact the proxy. To prevent the implementation contract from being used, you should invoke
 * the {_disableInitializers} function in the constructor to automatically lock it when it is deployed:
 *
 * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
 * ```
 * /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
 * constructor() {
 *     _disableInitializers();
 * }
 * ```
 * ====
 */
abstract contract Initializable {
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
     * @custom:oz-retyped-from bool
     */
    uint8 private _initialized;
    /**
     * @dev Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
     */
    bool private _initializing;
    /**
     * @dev Triggered when the contract has been initialized or reinitialized.
     */
    event Initialized(uint8 version);
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected initializer function that can be invoked at most once. In its scope,
     * `onlyInitializing` functions can be used to initialize parent contracts. Equivalent to `reinitializer(1)`.
     */
    modifier initializer() {
        bool isTopLevelCall = !_initializing;
        require(
            (isTopLevelCall && _initialized < 1) || (!AddressUpgradeable.isContract(address(this)) && _initialized == 1),
            "Initializable: contract is already initialized"
        );
        _initialized = 1;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = true;
        }
        _;
        if (isTopLevelCall) {
            _initializing = false;
            emit Initialized(1);
        }
    }
    /**
     * @dev A modifier that defines a protected reinitializer function that can be invoked at most once, and only if the
     * contract hasn't been initialized to a greater version before. In its scope, `onlyInitializing` functions can be
     * used to initialize parent contracts.
     *
     * `initializer` is equivalent to `reinitializer(1)`, so a reinitializer may be used after the original
     * initialization step. This is essential to configure modules that are added through upgrades and that require
     * initialization.
     *
     * Note that versions can jump in increments greater than 1; this implies that if multiple reinitializers coexist in
     * a contract, executing them in the right order is up to the developer or operator.
     */
    modifier reinitializer(uint8 version) {
        require(!_initializing && _initialized < version, "Initializable: contract is already initialized");
        _initialized = version;
        _initializing = true;
        _;
        _initializing = false;
        emit Initialized(version);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
     * {initializer} and {reinitializer} modifiers, directly or indirectly.
     */
    modifier onlyInitializing() {
        require(_initializing, "Initializable: contract is not initializing");
        _;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Locks the contract, preventing any future reinitialization. This cannot be part of an initializer call.
     * Calling this in the constructor of a contract will prevent that contract from being initialized or reinitialized
     * to any version. It is recommended to use this to lock implementation contracts that are designed to be called
     * through proxies.
     */
    function _disableInitializers() internal virtual {
        require(!_initializing, "Initializable: contract is initializing");
        if (_initialized < type(uint8).max) {
            _initialized = type(uint8).max;
            emit Initialized(type(uint8).max);
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (utils/Address.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library AddressUpgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
     * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
     *
     * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
     * types of addresses:
     *
     *  - an externally-owned account
     *  - a contract in construction
     *  - an address where a contract will be created
     *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
     * ====
     *
     * [IMPORTANT]
     * ====
     * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
     *
     * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
     * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
     * constructor.
     * ====
     */
    function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
        // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
        // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
        // of the constructor execution.
        return account.code.length > 0;
    }
    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://diligence.consensys.net/posts/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.5.11/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
     * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCall(target, data, "Address: low-level call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
     * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
     * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
     *
     * _Available since v3.1._
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        uint256 value,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
        require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
    }
    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     *
     * _Available since v3.3._
     */
    function functionStaticCall(
        address target,
        bytes memory data,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        require(isContract(target), "Address: static call to non-contract");
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResult(success, returndata, errorMessage);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Tool to verifies that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason using the provided one.
     *
     * _Available since v4.3._
     */
    function verifyCallResult(
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata,
        string memory errorMessage
    ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (success) {
            return returndata;
        } else {
            // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
            if (returndata.length > 0) {
                // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                    revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
                }
            } else {
                revert(errorMessage);
            }
        }
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract ContextUpgradeable is Initializable {
    function __Context_init() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function __Context_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
    }
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }
    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }
    /**
     * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
     * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
     * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
     */
    uint256[50] private __gap;
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.7.0) (utils/Strings.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev String operations.
 */
library StringsUpgradeable {
    bytes16 private constant _HEX_SYMBOLS = "0123456789abcdef";
    uint8 private constant _ADDRESS_LENGTH = 20;
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
     */
    function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        // Inspired by OraclizeAPI's implementation - MIT licence
        // https://github.com/oraclize/ethereum-api/blob/b42146b063c7d6ee1358846c198246239e9360e8/oraclizeAPI_0.4.25.sol
        if (value == 0) {
            return "0";
        }
        uint256 temp = value;
        uint256 digits;
        while (temp != 0) {
            digits++;
            temp /= 10;
        }
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(digits);
        while (value != 0) {
            digits -= 1;
            buffer[digits] = bytes1(uint8(48 + uint256(value % 10)));
            value /= 10;
        }
        return string(buffer);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        if (value == 0) {
            return "0x00";
        }
        uint256 temp = value;
        uint256 length = 0;
        while (temp != 0) {
            length++;
            temp >>= 8;
        }
        return toHexString(value, length);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
        buffer[0] = "0";
        buffer[1] = "x";
        for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
            buffer[i] = _HEX_SYMBOLS[value & 0xf];
            value >>= 4;
        }
        require(value == 0, "Strings: hex length insufficient");
        return string(buffer);
    }
    /**
     * @dev Converts an `address` with fixed length of 20 bytes to its not checksummed ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(address addr) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        return toHexString(uint256(uint160(addr)), _ADDRESS_LENGTH);
    }
}
// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165Upgradeable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}